CONSTRUCTION AND USE OF 
 'LLING 
 
 y**~, . :, V"'mii*| ' fffr ny>>| . ' <x******i 
 
 HIS ffil 
 **^ W^-~i U*~^J U^aw 
 
 IRLF 
 
 7b 7HS 
 
 
 
 MfllfllJfi 
 
r 
 
 REESE LIBRARY 
 
 OF Till-. 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA. 
 
 _n n n rs 
 
 
 
 
 
 
5 O 
 H-rH 
 
 73 C3 O 
 tfrH 
 
 tf-iH <D 
 
 -PC Ctf 
 
 w 0*0' o 
 
 H Ctf Cj (D 
 
 r<2 
 
 CQ <LJ 
 
 O <D <D O O 
 
 CH^ p^ cc O 
 
 rH ^ ^ O 
 
 o 
 
 c cc5 
 
 >* C 60 (D O 
 
 <D > 
 
 PQ O O Cj 
 
 >* O CD 
 
 * o & r-i 
 
 5 <D <D 
 
 ~rH > (D 
 
 & tf CQ ?s 
 
 C'J J-i^-iH <D 
 
 CD Cd X O 
 
 CD CDTj 
 
 HO I 
 
 -3 CD O 
 
 c 
 
 T3 
 
 ui 
 
 it 
 
 a. 
 
 fe 
 
 
 | 
 
 r~t !>: 
 
 lii '5 
 03 
 
 s 
 
 ? I 
 
 Ss 
 
 . s"^ 
 
 ^"H 
 
 NEW YORK OFFI 
 
 ctrical Exchange 
 
 > 
 
 h 
 K 
 U 
 ID 
 
 j 
 
 (0 
 
 n 
 
 :AGO OFFICE & 
 
 <n 
 
 E 
 
 o 
 
 _c 
 
 5 
 
 
 CO 
 
 S3 
 
 ^ ? 1 
 
 ^-^rk,^i 
 
 il 
 
 !! 
 
 ii 
 
 CODES USED 
 OUR OWN , 
 'EBERS STAN DA f 
 B.C. 4- ED ITI O 
 
 f 1 
 | ^o 
 
 C 
 
 - u 
 
 ^ 
 
 S$ 
 
 ~j x 
 
 G 
 
 o JH O 
 
 p^ i J^a 
 
 S <DCH'H ^ 
 
r ! ).. : 
 
 i 
 
A TREATISE 
 
 ON THE 
 
 CONSTRUCTION AND USE 
 
 OF 
 
 MILLING MACHINES 
 
 MADE ]?Y 
 
 BROWN & SHARPS MFG, CO,, 
 if 
 
 PROVIDENCE, R. I., U. S. A. 
 
 MANUFACTURERS OF 
 
 MACHINERY AND TOOLS. 
 
 PROVIDENCE, R. I. 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MANUFACTURING COMPANY 
 
 1896. 
 
Copyrighted 
 
 189G 
 By BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 Our chief object in writing^his, book is to assist those who 
 are not familiar with the construction or use of Universal or 
 Plain Milling Machines. We desire to aid in having the 
 machines well understood, properly cared for and profitably 
 operated. Beyond this, we hope we have written somewhat of 
 interest to those well versed in the theory and practice of 
 milling. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINES, GENERAL DESCRIPTION . i 
 
 DIMENSIONS OF UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINES .... 4 
 
 DESCRIPTION OF No. i UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINE . . 5 
 
 Spindle, Cone, Overhanging Arm, Table, Saddle .... 6 
 
 Knee, Stop-Rod, Feed, Adjustable Dials, Indexing Head-stock . 7 
 
 Feed Table 8 
 
 Vise, Overhead Works, Counter-shaft, Accessories .... 13 
 
 DESCRIPTION OF No. 2 UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINE . . 16 
 
 DESCRIPTION OF No. 3 UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINE . . 26 
 
 DESCRIPTION OF No. 4 UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINE . . 35 
 DESCRIPTION OF No. 4 (No. 3 PRIOR TO 1893) UNIVERSAL 
 
 MILLING MACHINE 41 
 
 PLAIN MILLING MACHINES 45 
 
 DIMENSION TABLES 46, 47 
 
 DESCRIPTION OF No. o PLAIN MILLING MACHINE ... 49 
 DESCRIPTION OF No. i PLAIN MILLING MACHINE 53 
 DESCRIPTION OF No. 2 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE ... 59 
 DESCRIPTION OF No. 3 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE ... 65 
 DESCRIPTION OF No. 4 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE ... 71 
 DESCRIPTION OF No. 5 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE . 77 
 DESCRIPTION OF No. 12 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE . . . 81 
 DESCRIPTION OF No. 13 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE ... 87 
 DESCRIPTION OF No. 23 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE ... 91 
 DESCRIPTION OF No. 24 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE ... 93 
 DESCRIPTION OF No, 2 VERTICAL SPINDLE MILLING MA- 
 CHINE 96 
 
VI BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 ATTACHMENTS, ETC. : 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Circular Milling Attachment . . . . 97 
 
 Gear Cutting Attachment . . . . . .98 
 
 Vertical Spindle Milling Attachments . . 99, 102, 103 
 
 High Speed Milling Attachment and Driving Fixture . . 103 
 
 Hand Milling Attachment ...... 106 
 
 Taper Milling Attachment ...... 107 
 
 Index Head and Centres with Centre Rest . . . 108 
 
 Index Centres, (Single Dial) , . . . 109 
 
 Index Centres . . . . . . .no 
 
 Universal Vise . . . . . . . in 
 
 Materials, Workmanship, Design, etc. . . . -113 
 
 CARE AND USE OF MILLING MACHINES : 
 
 Placing Machines and Counter-shafts, Diameter of Main Line 
 
 Pulley, Speed of Counter-shafts, Oiling . . 115 
 
 Placing Tools in Closets of Machines, Oil Pans, Adjusting 
 
 Spindle . . . . . . . . 117 
 
 Milling Machines and Skill . . . . . .119 
 
 CUTTERS USED ON MILLING MACHINES: 
 
 Fly Cutter, Formed Mills or Cutters, Gang Cutters . . 124 
 
 Outline Cuts, Showing Form of Cuts, Diameter of Mills . 129 
 
 Length of Mills, Diameter of Hole, Temper, Number of Teeth 131 
 
 Cutting Angle of Teeth of Mills . . . . . 133 
 
 Clearance of Mills, Sketches ..... 134 
 Templets, Sharpening Mills, Grade of Emery Wheel, Width of 
 
 Face, Use of Wheel . . -136 
 
 Sharpening Angular and Formed Cutters . . . 137 
 
 EXAMPLES OF OPERATIONS : 
 
 Use of Oil on the Cutters or Work . . . 140 
 Direction of Work Under Mills, Experiments to Test Method of 
 
 Running Cutter ....... 141 
 
 Speed of Mills, Average Speed . . 142 
 
 Limits in Milling ... ... 143 
 
 Speed and Feed Tables .... . 145 
 
 Pickling Castings and Forgings, Use of Appliances - 148 
 
 Examples of Work ..... . 149 
 
 Use of Two or Three Mills at One Time . . . 150 
 Fixtures for Small Work . .152 
 
 Cutting Slots ... . 154 
 
 Special Operations .... . 160 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. vii 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Milling Operations in the Manufacture of the No. i Universal Mil- 
 ling Machine Spiral Head and Foot-stock . . . 168 
 
 Milling Operations in the Manufacture of the No. 2 Universal Mil- 
 ling Machine ....... 170 
 
 DIRECT INDEXING : 
 
 Use of Indexing Head, Index Plate .... 176 
 
 Sector . . . . . . . .178 
 
 Index Tables ....... 179, 180 
 
 Dividing Cutters, etc., Fluting Taps and Reamers . . 182 
 
 Table for Setting when Using Tap or Reamer Cutter . . 183 
 
 Cutting Gears ....... 184 
 
 Worm Wheels, Worm Hob . . . . . .. 186 
 
 COMPOUND INDEXING : . . . . . .188 
 
 Use of Machines in Compound Indexing .... 189 
 
 Approximate Indexing by Compound Method . . . 190 
 
 Compound Index Tables . . . 191, 192, 193, 194, 195 
 
 Extra Divisions Obtained by Use of Adjustable Back Pin, 
 
 Compound Indexing ...... 198 
 
 Cutting Bevel Gears in a Universal Milling Machine. O. J. Beale 200 
 
 CUTTING SPIRALS WITH UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINES : 
 
 Selection of Change Gears . . . . . .212 
 
 Rules for Obtaining Ratio of Gears .... 214 
 
 Rules for Determining Number of Teeth . . . .214 
 
 Rules for Ascertaining Spiral Cut by Any Given Change Gears, 
 
 Position of the Spiral Bed in Cutting Spirals . . .215 
 Use of Machines in Cutting Spirals .... 216 
 
 Tables of Change Gears, Spirals and Angles . 218, 219, 220, 221 
 Natural Tangents and Cotangents . . . 222, 223 
 
 Setting for Spiral Mill Cutting . . . . 224 
 
 Twist Drills ........ 225 
 
 Table of Cutters for Making Straight Lipped Twist Drills . 229 
 
 Table of Cutters for Making Twist Drills . . . -230 
 
 Cutting Spirals with End Mills . . . . -231 
 
FIGURES SHOWING CAPACITY OF MACHINES. 
 
 We have placed in connection with the name and immediately 
 under the number of each machine, the figures that best indicate 
 its capacity the object being to assist those who desire to quickly 
 compare machines, or wish to remember or designate them by 
 their size in a way that is customary with lathes and planing 
 machines. 
 
 The first figure indicates the automatic longitudinal feed of 
 table, the second its transverse movement and the third the 
 distance it can be lowered from the centre of spindle. 
 
 For example the No. i Universal Milling Machine is headed 
 No. i, 17 in. x 6 in. x 18 in. Universal Milling Machine, and 
 indicates that the table has an automatic longitudinal feed of 1 7 
 in., a transverse movement of 6 in., and can be lowered 18 in. 
 from centre of spindle. 
 
 DIMENSIONS OF MACHINES. 
 
 The Dimensions and Details of Machines given are for the 
 machines made at the time of issuing this treatise. Changes 
 which may be made in future lots will be indicated in the edition 
 of the catalogue next following such change. Catalogues are 
 mailed on application. 
 
UNIVERSAL HILLING MACHINES. 
 
 A Universal has all the movements of a Plain Machine, and 
 in addition, the table is fed automatically at various angles to 
 the axis of the spindle, and the spiral head is so made and con- 
 nected with the feed screw that a positive rotary movement may 
 be given to the work. 
 
 Besides doing the work of a Plain Milling Machine it can 
 thus be used for an almost unlimited variety of other operations 
 in the manufacture of machinery and tools. 
 
 " Peculiarly American in its design and construction*, this 
 machine has done more for the introduction and demand for 
 American machinery in Europe than any other. 
 
 "As exhibited by J. R. Brown & Sharpe in 1867 at the Paris 
 Exhibition, it attracted the attention of engineers, machine tool 
 builders, gun and sewing machine makers, and the directors of 
 government arsenals and other large engineering works. It was 
 one of those special tools by the aid of which Americans have 
 been enabled to so far improve the construction of their 
 machinery, that they were at once successful competitors for 
 large orders of special and other machinery for governments and 
 other large industries. Europe from that time forward could 
 not afford to be without the Universal Milling Machine. Those 
 sent for exhibition were sold, soon after the opening, to Conti- 
 nental machine tool builders, ostensibly for the purpose of 
 using them as copies from which to build others. 
 
 " The workmanship on these machines was of such a quality 
 that the purchasers found difficulty in producing others of equal 
 character, except certain parts which were reproduced on these 
 same tools ; thus showing the imperative necessity of parent 
 tools containing within their own structure the inherent qualities 
 of truth and the highest excellence. 
 
 " One of the minor virtues in a good machine tool is general 
 convenience, easy access to the various parts, the arrangement 
 of handles for manipulation, and their being so combined that the 
 
 ^American Machinist, April, 1879, referring to No. i Universal Milling- Machine. 
 
2 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 attendant has not to waste his time in moving from the point of 
 action in order to reach them. Another highly important point 
 is that every tool should not only be sufficiently well made, but 
 that the means of adjustment and compensation for wear should 
 be such that the general soundness of the fitting can be main- 
 tained, and that the work produced by the machine during its life 
 time should be perfect, and require no fitting afterwards. This is 
 the true condition to be reached with tools, and a high standard is 
 not secured unless the tool has a combination of all the virtues 
 which should characterize a machine tool in this age of special 
 machinery. 
 
 "At the Vienna Exhibition of 1873, Continental tool builders 
 exhibited their copies of American Universal Milling Machines 
 and Revolving Head Screw Machines, " System Brown & Sharpe," 
 (so noted in the illustrated catalogue of one firm). Decidedly the 
 best copies of these machines were those exhibited by the Alsatian 
 firm of Ducommun & Steinlen of Mulhouse. 
 
 "At this exhibition, however, preference was given to the tools 
 exhibited by Brown & Sharpe, and the consequence was that their 
 tools were sold earlier and at a better price than the copies, some 
 of which were very creditable. 
 
 " The late Paris Exhibition was especially rich in creditable 
 productions of machinery of American design, very notable among 
 which were copies of the Brown & Sharpe Universal Milling- 
 Machine. 
 
 " These were exhibited by several tool builders in the French, 
 as also by a prominent English firm in the British section, who 
 were considerably chagrined at the reply of the International 
 Judges, who, in answer to their appeal for an award higher than 
 the silver medal (of which they had received notice), informed 
 them that with machinery as with the fine arts, ' copies were not 
 entitled to so high an award as were the originals.' 
 
 " No gold medal awarded was more deserved than that given 
 the Brown & Sharpe Manufacturing Co., for their fine exhibit of 
 special machine tools, from which Continental and other firms are 
 now constructing their copies." 
 
 " In 1889 at the Paris Exposition our exhibit was again honored. 
 It received the " Grand Prix," the highest possible distinction. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 3 
 
 The Universal Milling Machine, illustrated and described in the 
 following pages, form, with the exception of the No. 4, a series 
 of machines which was presented to the public generally for the 
 first time at the World's Columbian Exposition in Chicago in 
 1893. In connection with this line of the new machines we 
 exhibited the first No. i Universal Milling Machine made by us. 
 This machine, patented by Joseph R. Brown in 1865, and 
 extensively copied both in America and Europe, illustrated most 
 completely the fact, that notwithstanding the number of years 
 since its construction, there had been no changes in the funda- 
 mental principles of Universal Milling Machines. 
 
 Improvements of greater or less importance have been made in 
 the machines from time to time, and we have embodied in their 
 construction what we believe to be the best, making them more 
 convenient, rigid, and better adapted for the class of work for 
 which they are intended. 
 
 The following are some of the important features that have been 
 applied to all of the machines of this series : 
 
 i st. The Clamp Bed and Saddle are held together by three 
 bolts, far enough from the centre about which the Saddle swivels 
 to hold the parts firmly in whatever position they may be placed, 
 making it possible to take heavier cuts with less liability to 
 chatter. 
 
 2nd. The Table Feed is at the centre, and is automatic in 
 either direction and changed by simply operating a lever. This 
 construction allows the table to be fed automatically when swung 
 around to 45 either way. The Feed Stops are positive in their 
 action. 
 
 3rd. The Feed Connection is with the Knee instead of the 
 Table, which makes it possible to cut any angle of spiral within 
 the capacity of the machines without interference of the Universal 
 Joints, and the top is clear for long work. The Foot Stock may 
 be removed without taking out the bolt. 
 
 4th. The Centre in Overhanging Arm is adjustable, and the 
 Spindle is provided with a thread on the end, so that a face mill, 
 chuck, etc., can be used. 
 
 5th. The Table is provided with a pan and channels for 
 receiving the oil. 
 
DIMENSIONS OF UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINES, 
 
 NO, OF MACHINE. 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4* 
 
 No. of Ta*per Hole 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 in Spindle. 10 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 11 
 
 Distance from Cen- 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 tre of Spindle to 
 
 
 
 
 
 O. H. Arm. 
 
 5 1-2" 
 
 5 1-2" 
 
 63-8" 
 
 71-4" 
 
 Greatest Distance 
 
 
 
 
 
 from End of Spin- 
 
 
 
 
 
 dle to Centre in 
 
 
 
 
 
 O. H. Arm. 
 
 10 1-2" 
 
 14" 
 
 18" 
 
 24" 
 
 Back Geared. 
 
 No 
 
 Yes 
 
 Yes 
 
 Yes 
 
 Working Surface of 
 
 
 
 
 Table. 28 "x5 1-8" 
 
 32"x63-4" 
 
 40"x8" 
 
 48''x93^" 
 
 Transverse move- 
 
 
 
 
 ment of Table. 
 
 6" 
 
 1-2" 
 
 7 1-2" 
 
 8 1-2" 
 
 Greatest Distance 
 
 
 
 
 
 from Centre of 
 
 
 
 
 
 Spindle to Top of 
 
 
 
 
 
 Table, 
 
 18" 
 
 17 1-2" 
 
 18 1-2" 
 
 19" 
 
 Length of Auto- 
 
 
 
 
 
 matic Feed, 
 
 17" 
 
 20 1-2" 
 
 25" 
 
 28 1-2" 
 
 No, of changes of 
 
 
 
 
 
 Feed. 
 
 6 
 
 12 
 
 16 
 
 12 
 
 Variations in Feed 
 
 
 
 
 
 to one Rev. of 
 
 .004" to 
 
 .005" to 
 
 .003" to 
 
 .004" to 
 
 Spindle, 
 
 .073 
 
 .120" 
 
 .302" 
 
 .214" 
 
 Index Centres 
 
 
 
 
 
 Swing. 
 
 8" 
 
 10" 
 
 12" 
 
 14" 
 
 Index Centres 
 
 
 
 
 
 Take. 
 
 14" 
 
 15" 
 
 21" 
 
 26" 
 
 
 
 
 
 Net Weight. 
 
 1570 Ibs. 
 
 1750 Ibs. 
 
 2800 Ibs. 
 
 4150 Ibs. 
 
 Floor Space. 
 
 61"x59" 
 
 70-x66" 
 
 84-x75" 
 
 98"x87" 
 
 Design 1S93. 
 
BROWN' & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 No. 1 
 
 1 7 in. x 6 in. x 18 in. 
 
 UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINE 
 
 DESIGN OF 1895. 
 
 The table has an automatic longitudinal feed of 1 7 ", a trans- 
 verse movement of 6", and can be lowered 18" from centre of 
 spindle. 
 
 The centres swing 8" in diameter and take 14" in length. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 Ho. 1 UNIYERSAL MILLING MACHINE. 
 
 The size and capacity of the No. i Universal Milling Machine 
 adapt it for use in the ordinary shop. 
 
 It is pre-eminently a tool making machine, as is indicated by 
 the fact that in the department where we make our jigs and 
 fixtures, there are nearly as many No. i Universal Milling 
 Machines as engine lathes. In all we have about forty of these 
 machines in operation in our shops. 
 
 The Spindle has a hole \\" in diameter its entire length, 
 and at the front end a No. 10 taper hole. The spindle is 
 ground and lapped and runs in bronze boxes that can be 
 adjusted. The front box can be tightened by the nut A, Figure 8, 
 which brings the shoulder of the spindle against washers in front 
 of the frame of the machine. The rear box is adjusted by 
 tightening the nut C ; the front end of spindle is threaded, and 
 is provided with a guard nut D, which protects the thread when 
 not in use. 
 
 The Cone has four steps, the largest 10^" in diameter, 
 for 3" belt. 
 
 The Overhanging Arm has an adjustable centre, and can 
 be easily reversed to receive an attachment, turned out of the 
 way, or removed. The distance from the centre of the spindle 
 to the arm is 5^2"; greatest distance from end of spindle to 
 centre in arm, io*4" 
 
 The Table, including oil channels and pans, is 31" long and 
 6y 2 " wide, has a working surface 28" x 5^6", and a T-slot S/ 8 " 
 wide. By means of the shaft C, Figure 8, it can be moved 
 transversely 6". One revolution of the shaft moves the table .2". 
 
 The Saddle, which carries the table, pivots in the clamp bed, 
 and is rigidly clamped to it by three bolts, which slide in circular 
 slots and allow the table to be set at any angle to 45 either way 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 7 
 
 from zero. The saddle and knee are clamped by nuts with 
 fixed handles, thus dispensing with wrenches. 
 
 The Knee can be moved so that the top of the table at its 
 lowest point will be 18" from the centre of the spindle. One 
 revolution of crank moves the knee .1" '. 
 
 The Stop Rod has sliding collars, J J, Figure 8, which can be 
 readily set at any desired point when it is desired to limit the 
 movement of the knee. 
 
 The Feed of table, of 17", is automatic in either direction, 
 and as it is central can be changed by a simple movement of the 
 lever on front of table. It can be used running in either 
 direction, with the table at any angle to 45. The feed is driven 
 from the feed cone through the universal joints and telescopic 
 shafts on the side of the machine, page 5, the worm A, Figure 
 2, and worm wheel B, through the bevel gears, and the shaft 
 D, the bevel gear at the upper end of the shaft which drives the 
 loose bevel gears E E. Motion is imparted to the table by the 
 lever F and the clutch G. 
 
 An automatic stop is provided to release the feed at any point 
 when running in either direction. The auxiliary lever O, Figure 
 i, allows the feed to be released by hand. 
 
 A handle is provided at each end of the table for convenient 
 operation by hand. 
 
 There are 8 changes of feed, obtained by transposing the feed 
 cone pulleys, page 8, held in place by knurled nuts, giving a varia- 
 tion of feeds from .004" to .073" to one revolution of spindle. 
 The lower cone pulleys are on an adjustable bracket, which allows 
 the feed belt to be easily tightened. 
 
 Adjustable Dials graduated to read to thousandths of an inch 
 indicate the longitudinal, transverse and vertical movements of 
 table, and a series of graduations show in degrees the angle to 
 the axis of the spindle at which the table is set. The dials may 
 be adjusted without the aid of wrench or screw driver. 
 
 The Indexing Head Stock, or the Spiral Head is to 
 divide the periphery of a piece of work into a number of equal 
 parts. Besides this, it is so made that while the table is being 
 moved by the feed screw a positive rotary movement may be 
 given to the work. The velocity ratios of these movements are 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 FEED TABLE FOR No. I UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINE. 
 
 SPINDLE 
 SPEEDS 
 
 68 
 
 110 
 
 178 
 
 305 
 
 TRAVEL OF TABLE IN INCHES PER MINUTE. 
 
 _23 
 32 
 
 11 
 16 
 
 13 
 
 16 
 
 16 
 
 13 
 
 22 
 
KROWX A SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 FIG. 1. 
 
 FIG. 2. 
 
10 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 regulated by change gears, and any spiral provided for may be 
 cut without interfering with the divisions of the work obtainable 
 from the index plate. 
 
 Figs. 3 and 4, show the construction of the spiral head. The 
 spiral spindle, or spiral shell, is revolved by the index crank J, 
 through a worm and worm wheel. The worm wheel has forty 
 teeth and consequently one turn of the index crank or worm 
 shaft O, makes one-fortieth of a revolution of the spiral spindle, 
 and by the use of an index plate I, a turn of the worm shaft 
 may be divided into various definite parts and the fortieth of the 
 revolution of the spiral spindle correspondingly sub-divided. 
 
 In connection with the index plate there is a sector which is 
 used to obviate the necessity of counting the number of holes 
 in the plate when dividing the work. The index crank pin P, 
 in the crank J, may be used in any circle of holes in the index 
 plate by adjusting the crank. The index plate can be kept from 
 turning by the stop pin R. 
 
 The steel bushings, shown in black in the cuts, afford not only 
 an extended bearing for the worm shaft, but also serve as a 
 pivot for the spindle box B. The front end of the spindle can 
 thus be raised and the spindle set to any angle from five degrees 
 below the horizontal to a perpendicular. The angle is shown by 
 the graduations on one side of the spiral head. The spindle 
 receives the same arbors as the main spindle, and is threaded 
 for a chuck. When the chuck is not in use the thread is 
 protected by a guard nut. 
 
 Motion is transmitted to the spindle from the feed screw 
 through change gears to two mitre gears, one of which is shown 
 near T, Figure 3, and the other has upon its hub the gear marked 
 "worm gear," Figure 5. By this arrangement the spindle can be 
 automatically rotated at whatever angle it may be set. 
 
 Tables are sent with each machine, giving the change gears for 
 cutting sixty-eight spirals. The tables call for the " gear on worm " 
 the " first gear on stud," which means the first gear placed on stud, 
 the " second gear on stud," or second gear placed on stud, and 
 the "gear on screw." The spiral head and foot stock centres 
 swing 8" in diameter and take 14" in length. 
 
 The chuck sent with the machine is provided with a plate 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 II 
 
12 
 
 BROWN & SHAEPE MFG. CO. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 13 
 
 which fits the spiral head spindle. A second chuck plate is also 
 sent which fits the front of main spindle. 
 
 In oiling the machine it is important not to overlook the oil 
 holes L L L, Figure 2. These holes are reached from the front 
 of the table, when the table is placed in the three positions by 
 matching lines on the table with a zero line on the front of the 
 saddle. 
 
 Spirals not given in the table may be cut by using special 
 gears or by determining by calculation many combinations of 
 the regular gears not given in the table. 
 
 The three index plates sent with the machine have 15, 16, 17, 
 18, 19, 20 ; 21, 23, 27, 29, 31, 33, and 37, 39, 41, 43, 47, 49 holes 
 respectively. 
 
 By means of the raising block the spiral head may be set at any 
 angle on the bed. 
 
 The Vise swivels and has a graduated base, and may be set 
 at any angle on the bed. The jaws are 5^" wide, i j4j" deep and 
 will open 2^". The jaws are made of steel and left soft unless 
 otherwise ordered. Being held by screws they may be taken off 
 and others designed for special work put in their places. 
 
 The Overhead Works, Figs.' 6 and 7, include a shipper 
 rod, stops and studs for attaching the lever, also hangers with 
 adjustable self-oiling boxes. 
 
 The Counter Shaft has two 14 inch friction pulleys for 
 3^ inch belts, and is usually run at about no revolutions a 
 minute. 
 
 Floor Space measured over the extreme projections and points 
 of travel of the various parts, 61x59 inches. 
 
 Weight of the machine ready for shipment is about 2040 
 pounds. 
 
 Net Weight, about 1570 pounds. 
 
 Dimensions of box in which the machine is packed are 
 49x35x62 inches. 
 
 Each machine is furnished with change gears, index plates and 
 tables explaining the use of same, 6" 3 jawed chuck, and extra 
 chuck plate, vise, collet, centre rest, raising block, hand wheel, 
 wrenches, Treatise on Milling Machines, and everything else shown 
 in cut, together with overhead works. 
 
BROWN & SHaRPE MFG. CO- 
 
UNIVZtt'SlT 
 
 CAi ; f. ,kH^ - 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 SCORING WORM GEAR 
 
 No. 1 Universal Milling Machine. 
 
i6 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 No. 2 
 
 20 1-2 in. x6 1-2 in. x 17 1-2 in. 
 
 UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINE. 
 
 The table has an automatic longitudinal feed of 2o}4", a trans- 
 verse movement of 6}4", and can be lowered 17^" from centre 
 of spindle. 
 
 The centres swing 10" in diameter and take 15" in length. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 17 
 
 No. 2 
 
 20 1-2 in. x6 1-2 in. x 17 1-2 in. 
 
 UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINE. 
 
 Patented Feb. 5, 1884; Feb. 14, 1893; May 23, 1893. 
 
 This machine is well adapted for tool room and tool making 
 purposes, where a more rigid, but not necessarily larger machine 
 is required than the No. i, Universal Milling Machine, or when 
 saws and cutters of a comparatively large diameter are to be used. 
 
 The machine is the smallest of the Universal Milling Machines 
 constructed with back gears, and in the main is similar to the 
 No. i. The principal differences, aside from the necessary 
 changes in design b^ the application of back gears, are the details 
 of the automatic feed, spiral head and foot stock. A perspective 
 view of the machine is shown on page 16 and a cross section on 
 page 1 8. 
 
 The ^pincti^ has a hole f J" in diameter its entire length and 
 at the iront end a No. 10 taper hole. The spindle is ground and 
 lapped and runs in bronze boxes that are adjustable. The front 
 box can be tightened by the nut A, Fig. 8, which brings the 
 shoulder of the collar against washers on front of the frame. The 
 rear box is adjusted by the nut C ; the front end of spindle is 
 threaded, and is provided with a guard nut D, which protects the 
 thread when not in use. 
 
 The Cone has 3 steps, the largest ic" diameter, for 3" belt, 
 and is back geared, giving 6 changes of speed. The gears are 
 covered. 
 
 The Overhanging Arm has an adjustable centre, and can be 
 easily reversed to receive an attachment, turned out of the way, 
 or removed. The distance from the centre of the spindle to the 
 arm is 5^"; greatest distance from end of spindle to centre in 
 arm, 14". 
 
 The Table, including oil pans and channels, is 35^2" long, 8" 
 wide, has a working surface 32" x 6^ /r , and 2 T slots f" wide. 
 
i8 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 FIG. 8. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 FIG. 9. 
 
 FIG. 1O. 
 
20 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 By means of the shaft C, Fig. 9, it can be moved transversely 
 6/4' ' - One revolution of the shaft moves the table ,2" '. 
 
 The Saddle, which carries the table, pivots in the clamp bed, 
 and is rigidly clamped to it by three bolts which slide in circular 
 slots and allow the table to be set at any angle to 45 degrees, 
 each way from zero. The saddle and knee are clamped by fixed 
 handles, thus dispensing with wrenches. 
 
 The Knee can be moved so that the top of the table will be 
 17^ " from the centre of spindle at its lowest point. One revo- 
 lution of the crank moves the table .\" . The knee rests on ball 
 bearings as shown at J, Fig. 9, which allow it to be easily moved. 
 
 The Stop Rod has sliding collars J J, Fig. 8, which can be 
 readily set when it is desired to limit the movement of the knee. 
 
 The Feed of table, 20^", is automatic in either direction and 
 can be changed by a simple movement of a lever on the front of 
 the saddle, and as it is driven from the centre it can be used with 
 table clamped at any angle, to 45, to the axis of the spindle. 
 The feed is driven from the feed cones through bevel gears by the 
 shaft A, Fig. 9, through the bevel gear B to shaft carrying bevel 
 gear P, then through bevel gear E on lower end of vertical shaft. 
 The clutch G is operated by lever F. An automatic stop is pro- 
 vided to release the feed at any point when running in either 
 direction. The auxiliary lever O allows the feed to be released 
 by hand, and as it can only be moved in one direction there is 
 never any doubt as to how to proceed in releasing feed, when 
 table is being fed in either direction. The table may be moved 
 by hand from either end, as a handle is provided at each end 
 for this purpose. 
 
 Twelve changes of feed may be obtained by transposing the 
 feed cone pulleys F, G, H, Fig. 8, held in place by knurled nuts, 
 giving a variation of feeds from .005" to .12" to one revolution of 
 spindle. For feed table see page 2 1 . 
 
 Adjustable Dials, graduated to read to thousandths of an 
 inch, indicate the longitudinal, transverse and vertical movements 
 of table, and a series of graduations show in degrees the angle to 
 the axis of the spindle at which the table is set. The dials may 
 be adjusted without the aid of wrench or screw driver. 
 
 The Spiral Head furnished with the Nos. 2, 3, and 4, design 
 of 1893, Universal Milling Machines, presents special features in 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 21 
 
 FEED TABLE FOR No. 2 UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINE. 
 
22 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 that the form admits of the body's being clamped as solidly in 
 one position as in another by two bolts which are placed in 
 a convenient position on the side, and also that when the spindle 
 is at an angle of 90 with the bed the end of the spindle is 
 comparatively low, thus making it very rigid in this position. In 
 doing many kinds of work, as in cutting the flutes in reamers, end 
 mills, etc., the use of the worm and worm wheel can be dispensed 
 with, and indexing done by revolving the spindle by hand. 
 
 The motion is transmitted from the feed screw through change 
 gears to two spiral gears. By this arrangement the spindle can 
 be automatically rotated at whatever angle it may be set. 
 
 Tables are sent with each machine, giving the change gears for 
 cutting sixty-eight spirals. The tables call for the " gear on worm," 
 the " first gear on stud," which means the first gear placed on 
 stud, "the second gear on stud," or second gear placed on stud, 
 and the "gear on screw." 
 
 When it is desired to rotate the spindle independently of the 
 worm and worm wheel, the worm A, Fig. 12, is arranged so that 
 it may be thrown out of gear with the worm wheel B, when the 
 spindle may be turned by hand and locked by the index plate C 
 and pin D. An additional clamp is provided to hold the spindle, 
 so that the strain will not come on the index pin and plate. 
 
 To throw the worm out of gear : turn the knob E (by means of 
 the pin wrench) about a quarter of a revolution in the reverse 
 direction to that indicated by the arrow stamped on knob E ; this 
 will loosen nut G, which holds eccentric bushing H ; then with 
 the fingers turn at the same time both knobs E and F, and the 
 eccentric bushing H will be revolved and the worm disengaged 
 from the worm wheel. 
 
 To replace the worm : turn the knobs E and F in the direction 
 marked by the arrow, and tighten the knob E with the pin 
 wrench. 
 
 The Foot-stock, Fig. u, has an adjustable centre; two taper 
 pins, one of which is shown at Z, are used to accurately locate 
 this centre in line with the head-stock centre. When it is 
 desirable to set at an angle out of parallel with the base, as in 
 cutting taper reamers, drills, etc., the centre can be elevated or 
 depressed by means of a rack and pinion actuated by the nut U. 
 The centre is firmly held in any position by the nuts W, X, and Y. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
24 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 The advantage of this is easily appreciated from the fact that 
 the use of centres that can not be adjusted work is apt to become 
 cramped at certain positions during its revolution, and as a result 
 even spacing cannot always be obtained. 
 
 FIG. 13. 
 
 To quickly adjust the foot-stock centre in line with the spiral 
 hea'd centre a gauge, consisting of a bushing and a blade, Fig. 13, 
 can be used. The bushing fits on a milling arbor, and the lower 
 edge of the blade is the same distance above the centre as the top 
 of the foot-stock centre. The head stock centre is set at the 
 desired angle and the foot-stock centre is set so as to be parallel 
 with and touching the edge of the blade. When it is correctly set 
 the work revolves as freely as though both head and foot-stock 
 centres were parallel with the table. If it is desirable to obtain 
 angles greater than those allowed by the foot-stock, parallels can 
 be used under the foot-stock. 
 
 The Frame is hollow and fitted as a closet to hold the small 
 parts that accompany the machine. On the left side of the frame 
 there is a pan for holding small tools, etc., and on the front of 
 this there is a rack for wrenches. On the other side of the frame 
 is a shelf for holding the spiral head and vise when they are not 
 in use. 
 
 The Vise swivels and has a graduated base. The jaws are 
 5^6" wide, \Y%" deep and will open 2^". 
 
 The Counter-Shaft has 2 friction pulleys 14" in diameter for 
 3^" belts, and should run about 180 revolutions per minute. 
 
 Weight of machine ready for shipment, about 2275 Ibs. 
 
 Net Weight, about 1750 Ibs. 
 
 Floor Space, 7o"x66". 
 
 Dimensions of box in which machine is shipped, 49"x35"x62". 
 
 Each machine is furnished with change gears, index plates and 
 tables explaining the use of same, 6" 3-jawed chuck, and extra 
 chuck plate, vise, collet, centre rest, raising block, hand wheel, 
 wrenches, Treatise on Milling Machines, and everything shown in 
 cut, together with overhead works. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 2 5 
 
 MILLING FACE OF UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINE KNEE. 
 
2 6 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 No. 3 
 
 25 in. x 7 1-2 in. x 18 1-2 in. 
 
 UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINE. 
 
 The table has an automatic longitudinal feed of 25", a trans- 
 verse movement of 7^", and can be lowered 18^" from centre 
 
 of spindle. 
 
 The centres swing 12" in diameter and take 21" in length. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 27 
 
 No. 3 
 
 25 in. x 7 1 -2 in. x 1 8 1 -2 in. 
 
 UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINE 
 
 With Hand or Power Transverse and Vertical Feeds. 
 
 Patented Feb. 5, 1884 ; Feb. 14, 1893 ; May 23, 1893. 
 
 The machine is similar in design to the No. 2 Universal Milling 
 Machines and has the additional feature that it can be furnished, 
 when desired, with Power Transverse and Vertical Feeds. 
 
 The Spindle has a hole fy" in diameter its entire length and 
 runs in bronze boxes provided with means of compensation for 
 wear. For method of adjusting see page 17. It is ground and 
 lapped. The front end is threaded and has a No. 1 1 taper hole. 
 
 The Cone has 3 steps, the largest u" diameter, for 3^2" belt 
 and is back geared, giving 6 changes of speed. The gears are 
 covered. 
 
 The Overhanging Arm has a bearing for outer end of arbor, 
 etc., as well as an adjustable centre. It can be easily reversed to 
 receive an attachment, turned out of the way, or removed. The 
 distance from the centre of the spindle to the arm is 6^/6" ; greatest 
 distance from end of spindle to centre in arm, 18". 
 
 The Table, including oil pans and channels, is 44^ " long, 
 9^ "wide, has a working surface 40" x 8", 2 T slots B/ 8 " wide, a 
 transverse movement of 7^>", and can be lowered i8>^" from 
 centre of spindle. 
 
 The details of the Power Transverse Feed mechanism, furnished 
 with this machine when desired, are shown in Figs. 14 and 15. 
 The clutch gear A, Fig. 14, revolves constantly and is driven by 
 the gear G, Fig. 16. The transverse or cross feed is operated 
 by turning knob 2, Figs. 14 and 15 ; this operating the lever C 
 
28 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 
 
 
 
 -_ tr - 
 . 4^x 
 
 ^l||_BJSsH 
 
 FIG. 15. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 29 
 
 throws the clutch I) into mesh with the clutch gear A, Fig. 14. 
 The movable stop E can be set to release the feed automatically 
 at any desired point. 
 
 The Saddle, which carries the table, pivots in the clamp bed, 
 and is rigidly clamped to it by three bolts which slide in circular 
 slots and allow the table to be set at any angle to 45 degrees, 
 each way from zero. The saddle and knee are clamped by fixed 
 handles, thus dispensing with wrenches. 
 
 The Knee can be lowered i&y" from centre of spindle, and 
 has a stop rod with sliding collars which may be quickly set at 
 any desired point. The details of the Power Vertical Feed, 
 furnished on this machine when desired, are shown in Fig. 16. 
 The vertical feed is driven from the feed cone pulleys through the 
 shaft A, and bevel gears B B. The direction of the feed is 
 determined by clutch C, which can be changed by loosening a 
 knurled nut on the side of the box protecting the gears and clutch, 
 and moving the clutch up or down and again tightening the nut. 
 The driving shaft D transfers the power through the bevel gears 
 E E to shaft F, carrying the spur gear G, meshing into the gear 
 at the side of the clutch H ; to throw the feed in the knob I is 
 drawn out, which engages the clutch H with the continuously 
 running spur gears, thus driving the bevel gears K K, which 
 drive the screw L. The feed can be released instantly by the 
 handle J, or the trip lever M, which is actuated by the dogs, at the 
 end of the sliding key N. The stops O O can be set at any 
 desired point, relatively to the lug P, to determine the position at 
 which it is desired to release this feed. 
 
 The Feed of table, 25", is automatic in either direction, and 
 can be changed by a simple movement of a lever on the front of 
 the saddle, and as it is driven from the centre it can be used with 
 table clamped at any angle, to 45, to the axis of the spindle. 
 There are 16 changes of feed obtained by transposing the feed 
 cone pulleys, held in place by knurled nuts, page 31, varying from 
 .003" to .302" to one revolution of the spindle. The table may 
 be moved by hand from either end, as at each end a handle is 
 provided for this purpose. 
 
 Adjustable Dials, graduated to read to thousandths of an 
 inch, indicate the longitudinal, transverse and vertical movements 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 FEED TABLE FOR NO. 3 UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINE. 
 
 003. 005. 008 .012. 016 .018. 024. 028. 036. 041. 057. 062 .087. 129. 193. 30$ 
 
 TRAVEL OF TABLE 
 
32 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 of table, and a series of graduations show in degrees the angle to 
 the axis of the spindle at which the table is set. The dials may 
 be adjusted without the aid of wrench or screw-driver. 
 
 The Spiral Head has indexing mechanism by which the 
 periphery of a piece of work may be divided into equal parts, and 
 the velocity of the rotary motion of its spindle, 01 of the work, 
 relative to the speed of the feed screw, is regulated by change 
 gears at the end of the table. Any spiral, of the 68 provided for, 
 may be cut without interfering with the divisions obtainable from 
 the index plates sent with the machine. A plate for rapid index- 
 ing of work into 24 or less divisions is placed directly on the 
 spindle, and the worm which turns the spindle may be thrown 
 quickly out of gear by a knurled knob on the back of the spiral 
 head to allow for this direct or plain indexing. The spindle of 
 the spiral head may be moved continuously, or through any 
 required portion of a revolution. The spiral head may be set at 
 any angle on the table by use of the raising block. The front 
 end of the spindle has a No. 1 1 taper hole and is threaded. 
 
 The head can be set and rigidly clamped, at any angle between 
 .TO degrees below the horizontal and 10 degrees beyond the 
 perpendicular. The side of the spiral head is graduated in degrees 
 to show the angle of the elevation of the spindle. The Spiral 
 Head and Foot-Stock Centres swing 12" in diameter, and take 
 21 " in length. 
 
 The Foot-Stock spindle may be raised vertically, and set at an 
 angle in a vertical plane. By this arrangement the spiral head 
 and foot-stock spindles may, in ordinary use, be kept in line 
 when the front of the spiral head spindle has been elevated or 
 depressed. 
 
 For detailed description, sketch and method of using spiral 
 head and foot-stock see pages 20 to 24. 
 
 The Frame is hollow, and fitted as a closet to hold the small 
 parts that accompany the machine. On the left side of the frame 
 there is a pan for holding small tools, etc., and on the front of 
 this there is a rack for wrenches. On the other side of the frame 
 is a shelf for holding the spiral head and vise when they are not 
 in use. 
 
 The Vise swivels and has a graduated base. The, jaws are 
 6y&" wide, i T y deep, and will open 3^". 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 33 
 
 The Counter-Shaft has friction pulleys 16" in diameter for 4" 
 belts, and should run about 175 revolutions per minute. 
 
 Weight of machine ready for shipment, about 3575 Ibs. 
 
 Net Weight, about 2800 Ibs. 
 
 Floor Space, 8 4 "x7 5 ". 
 
 Dimensions of box in which machine is shipped, 59'^ 40" x 67". 
 
 Each machine is furnished with change gears, index plates, and 
 tables explaining the use of same, 8" 3-] awed chuck, and extra 
 chuck plate, vise, collet, centre rest, raising block, hand wheel, 
 wrenches, Treatise on Milling Machines, and everything shown in 
 cut, together with overhead works. 
 
34 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 No. 4 
 
 28 1-2 in. x8 1-2 in. x 19 in. 
 
 UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINE. 
 
 DESIGN OF 1893 
 
 The table has an automatic longitudinal feed of 28^", a trans- 
 verse movement of 8%", and can be lowered 19" from centre of 
 spindle. 
 
 The centres swing 14" in diameter and take 26" in length. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 35 
 
 No. 4 
 
 28 1-2 in. x 8 1-2 in. x 19 in. 
 
 UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINE 
 
 With Hand or Power Transverse and Vertical Feeds. 
 DESIGN OF 1893. 
 
 Patented Feb. 5, 1884 ; Feb. 14, 1893 ; May 23, 1893. 
 
 This machine, while in its general construction is similar to the 
 preceding machine described, is heavier. It is well adapted for 
 use in shops where machine construction demands a Universal 
 Milling Machine 'of this capacity. 
 
 The Spindle has a hole %" in diameter its entire length and 
 runs in bronze boxes provided with means of compensation for 
 wear. For method of adjusting seepage 17. It is ground and 
 lapped. The front end is threaded and has a No. 1 1 taper hole. 
 
 The Cone has 3 steps, the largest 13" in diameter, for 3^" belt 
 and is back geared, giving 6 changes of speed. The gears are 
 covered. 
 
 The Overhanging Arm has a bearing for outer end of arbor, 
 etc., as well as an adjustable centre. It can be easily reversed to 
 receive an attachment, turned out of the way, or removed. The 
 distance from the centre of the spindle to the arm is 7 % " ; great- 
 est distance from end of spindle to centre in arm, 24". 
 
 The Table, including oil pans and channels, is 53/^" long, 
 \\Y%" wide, has a working surface 48" x 9^", 2 T slots Y^' f wide, 
 a transverse movement of 8^/2" and can be lowered 19" from 
 centre of spindle. 
 
 The details of the Power Transverse Feed mechanism, furnished 
 with this machine when desired, are similar to those on the No. 3 
 Universal Milling Machine described on page 27. 
 
36 BROWN &. SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 The Saddle, which carries the table, pivots in the clamp bed 
 and is rigidly clamped to it by three bolts which slide in circular 
 slots and allow the table to be set at any angle to 45 degrees, 
 each way from zero. The saddle and knee are clamped by fixed 
 handles, thus dispensing with wrenches. 
 
 The Knee can be lowered vertically 19" from centre of spindle, 
 and has a stop rod with sliding collars which may be quickly set 
 at any desired point. 
 
 The details of the Power Vertical Feed mechanism, furnished 
 with this machine when desired, are similar to those on the No. 3 
 Universal Milling Machine described on page 29. 
 
 The Feed of table, 28^", is automatic in either direction and 
 can be changed by a simple movement of a lever on the front of 
 the saddle, and as it is driven from the centre it can be used with 
 table clamped at any angle, to 45, to the axis of the spindle. 
 There are 1 2 changes of feed, obtained by transposing the feed 
 cone pulleys, held in place by knurled knobs, page 37, varying 
 from .004" to .2 1 4" to one revolution of spindle. A handle is 
 provided at each end of the table for convenient operation by hand. 
 
 Adjustable Dials graduated to read to thousandths of an inch 
 indicate the longitudinal, transverse and vertical movements of 
 table, and a series of graduations show in degrees the angle to 
 the axis of the spindle at which the table is set. The dials may 
 be adjusted without the aid of wrench or screw-driver. 
 
 The Spiral Head has indexing mechanism by which the 
 periphery of a piece of work may be divided into equal parts, and 
 the velocity of the rotary motion of its spindle, or of the work, 
 relative to the speed of the feed screw, is regulated by change 
 gears at the end of the table. Any spiral of the 68 provided for 
 may be cut without interfering with the divisions obtainable from 
 the index plates sent with the machine. A plate for rapid index- 
 ing of work into 24 or less divisions is placed directly on the 
 spindle, and the worm which turns the spindle may be thrown 
 quickly out of gear by a knurled knob on the back of the spiral 
 head to allow for this direct or plain indexing. The spindle of 
 the spiral head may be moved continuously, or through any 
 required portion of a revolution. The spiral head may be set at 
 any angle on the table by use of the raising block. The front 
 end of spindle has a No. 1 1 taper hole and is threaded. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 37 
 
 FEED TABLE FOR NO. 4 UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINE. 
 DESIGN OF 1893. 
 
 SPIN. 
 
 STUD 
 
 FEED 
 SHAFT 
 
 FEED PER. 
 REV. OF 
 SPINDLE 
 
 004 .006 .010 .016 .024 .025 .036 .037 .058 .090 .144 .214 
 
 TRAVEL OF TABLE IN INCHES PER MINUTE 
 
 i~n7 
 
 32 
 
 14 
 
 18 
 
 16 
 
 16 
 
 4 
 
 23 
 
 32 
 
 32 
 
 
 30 
 
 4 
 
 16 
 
 39 
 
 32 
 
 
 3 
 
 50 
 
 4 
 
 10 
 
 112 
 
 16 
 
 10 
 
 24 
 
 144 
 
 
 13 
 
 20 f 
 
 30 f 
 
 186 
 
 4 
 
 
 10 
 
 16 
 
 26 f 
 
 39 
 
 240 
 310 
 400 
 
 31 
 32 
 
 ML 
 
 il- 
 
 8 
 
 4 
 
 
 10 
 
 "I 
 
 13 
 
 is 
 
 23 1 
 
 t 
 
 28 
 36 
 
 66 2 
 
 85 i 
 
38 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 The head can be set at any angle between 10 degrees below the 
 horizontal and 10 degrees beyond the perpendicular, and rigidly 
 clamped at any point. The side of the spiral head is graduated 
 in degrees to show the angle of the elevation of the spindle. The 
 Spiral Head and Foot-Stock Centres swing 14" in diameter and 
 take 26" in length. 
 
 The Foot-Stock spindle may be raised vertically and set at an 
 angle in a vertical plane. By this arrangement the spiral head 
 and foot-stock spindles may, in ordinary use, be kept in line when 
 the front of the spiral head spindle has been elevated or 
 depressed. 
 
 For detailed description, sketch and method of using the spiral 
 head and foot-stock see pages 20 to 24. 
 
 The Frame is hollow and fitted as a closet to hold the small 
 parts that accompany the machine. On the left side of the frame 
 there is a pan for holding small tools, etc., and on the front of 
 this there is a rack for wrenches. On the other side of the frame 
 is a shelf for holding the spiral head and vise when they are not 
 in use. 
 
 The Vise swivels and has a graduated base. The jaws are 
 6>4j" wide, i T V deep and will open 3^". 
 
 The Counter-Shaft has tight and loose pulleys 16" in diameter 
 for 4" belts, and should run about 175 revolutions per minute. 
 
 Weight of machine ready for shipment, about 4950 Ibs. 
 
 Net Weight, about 4150 Ibs. 
 
 Floor Space, 98" x 87". 
 
 Dimensions of box in which machine is shipped, 67" x 46" x 70". 
 
 Each machine is furnished with change gears, index plates and 
 tables explaining the use of same, 9" 3-jawed chuck and extra 
 chuck plate, vise, collet, centre rest, raising block, hand wheel, 
 wrenches, Treatise on Milling Machines, and everything shown in 
 cut, together with overhead works. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 39 
 
 UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINE IN OPERATION. 
 
4 o 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 No. 4 Universal Milling Machine. 
 
 (No. 3, Prior to 1893.) 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 41 
 
 No. 4 
 
 22 in. x 6 3-8 in. x 21 in. 
 
 UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINE. 
 
 (No. 3, Prior to 1893.) 
 
 This machine is similar in its general design to the No. i 
 Universal Milling Machine made prior to 1895, but is heavier and 
 back geared. 
 
 The Spindle runs in bronze boxes and can be adjusted to com- 
 pensate for wear by tightening the nuts C and V, Fig. 17. The 
 end thrust of the spindle is taken by a washer as shown at N. 
 The front end has a '*No. 1 1 taper hole. 
 
 The Cone has 3 steps for ^A" belt and is back geared, the 
 back gears are placed beneath the cone and may be taken out 
 by unscrewing the screw G, taking off the lever and taking out 
 the screw M ; the lever is then put back and the eccentric shaft 
 with the bushing pulled out. 
 
 The Overhanging Arm has a movable arbor support with an 
 adjustable centre. Distance from centre of spindle to arm, 4". 
 
 The Table is 40" long and 7" wide, has a T slot y" wide, a 
 transverse movement of 6 24", and can be lowered 21 "from centre 
 of spindle. It can be set at any angle to 45 degrees. 
 
 The Feed of table, of 22", is automatic in either direction. 
 There are 6 changes of feed varying from .004" to .05" to one 
 revolution of spindle. 
 
 Adjustable Dials, graduated to read to thousandths of an inch, 
 indicate the transverse and vertical movements of table. 
 
 The Spiral Head and Foot-Stock Centres, similar in design to 
 those described on page 7, swing n^" m diameter and take 
 22^" in length. The head can be set at any angle from 5 
 degrees below the horizontal to the perpendicular. The front end 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 FIG. 17. 
 
FROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 43 
 
 of spindle is threaded and has a No. 1 1 taper hole. The straight 
 hole through spindle, at end of taper, is i^" in diameter. The 
 head can be set at any angle on table by means of the raising 
 block. 
 
 The Vise swivels and has a graduated base. The jaws are 
 &/%" wide, ijV' deep and will open 3^ / 8 // . 
 
 The Counter-Shaft has 2 friction pulleys 16" in diameter for 
 4" belts and should run about 105 revolutions per minute. 
 
 Weight of machine ready for shipment, about 3900 Ibs. 
 
 Net Weight, about 3165 Ibs. 
 
 Floor Space, 74" xsy". 
 
 Dimensions of box in which machine is shipped, 63" x 40" x 7 i". 
 
 Each machine is furnished with change gears, index plates, and 
 tables explaining use of same, 9" 3-jawed chuck, vise, collet, 
 centre rest, raising block, hand wheel, wrenches, Treatise on 
 Milling Machines, and everything shown in cut, together with 
 overhead works. 
 
44 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 MILLING ELECTRIC MOTOR GEARS ON A PLAIN MILLING MACHINE. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 45 
 
 PLAIN MILLING MACHINES. 
 
 The majority of milling is plain milling. Cutting spirals, or 
 work that is milled when the table is at an angle, other than a 
 right angle, with the spindle, form a comparatively small part of 
 the work done even on Universal Milling Machines. Where a 
 shop can have but one machine, without doubt it should be a 
 Universal, for then the workman is prepared for any operation 
 that may be required. When a second machine, however, is to 
 be purchased the advantages of obtaining a plain milling machine 
 should be considered. The plain machines are more simple and 
 consequently comparatively low priced, and as the table is not 
 swiveled it can rest directly upon the knee or other support, 
 rendering the machine stiffer and enabling a heavier cut to be 
 taken and frequently more work produced in any given time. 
 
 To operate a Plain Machine requires so little attention, com- 
 paratively, that frequently the man who runs it can also run a 
 Universal Machine. On many classes of work boys can be 
 employed, and in a number of cases one boy can operate as many 
 as four machines. As the advantage of plain milling is more 
 adequately appreciated the number of machines in use is rapidly 
 increasing. At one time it was thought that only irregular shaped 
 or small pieces could be milled advantageously, but it is now quite 
 well known that very many plain surfaces and large pieces can be 
 milled more profitably than they can be planed. The cutter 
 moving constantly through the work will accomplish more than 
 the planing tool with its intermittent action. It is also now more 
 fully appreciated than formerly, that usually cutters can be made 
 quite cheaply, and with care will last a long time, also that in 
 manufacturing, even though the special cutters and fixtures are 
 comparatively expensive, the saving in time and the superior 
 accuracy of the work make their use profitable. 
 
 For a number of years we have used and built Plain Milling 
 Machines, and they have formed parts of the exhibits which have 
 been honored by the juries of award in the various world 
 expositions during the past twenty-five years. 
 
DIMENSIONS OF PLAIN MILLING MACHINES. 
 
 NO. OF MACHINE. 
 
 1 2345 
 
 No. Prior to 1893. 
 
 4 
 
 
 6 
 
 8 
 
 No. of Taper Hole 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 in 'Spindle. 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 10 
 
 . 11 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 Distance from 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Centre of Spin- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 dle to O. H. 
 
 5 1-8" 
 
 5 1-2" 
 
 5-1-2" 
 
 63-8" 
 
 71-4" 
 
 81-8" 
 
 Arm. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Greatest Dis- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tance from End 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 of Spindle to 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Centre in O. H. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Arm. 
 
 10 1-2" 
 
 16" 
 
 16" 
 
 21" 
 
 261-2" 
 
 24" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Back Geared. 
 
 No 
 
 No 
 
 Yes 
 
 Yes 
 
 Yes 
 
 Yes 
 
 Working Surface 
 of Table. 
 
 20"x6" 
 
 32" x 
 
 71-2" 
 
 34" xlO" 
 
 42' x!2 
 
 48 ; 'xl4" 
 
 ->4"xl6" 
 
 Transverse 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Movement of 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Table. 
 
 4 1-4" 
 
 6 1-2" 
 
 6 1-2" 
 
 7" 
 
 8 1-4" 
 
 93-4" 
 
 Transverse 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Movement o f 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Table fitted 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 with Oil Pump. 
 
 
 
 
 6" 
 
 7 1-8" 
 
 81-4" 
 
 Greatest Dis- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tance from 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Centre of Spin- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 dle to Top of 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Table. 
 
 15" 
 
 181-2" 
 
 18 1-2" 
 
 193-4" 
 
 22" 
 
 19 1-2" 
 
 Length of Auto- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 matic Feed. 
 
 16" 
 
 24" 
 
 28" 
 
 34" 
 
 42" 
 
 48" 
 
 No. of Changes 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 of Feed. 
 
 8 
 
 8 
 
 12 
 
 16 
 
 12 
 
 8 
 
 Variations in 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Feed to one 
 
 .005" to 
 
 .007" to 
 
 .006" to 
 
 .004" to 
 
 .005" to 
 
 023" to 
 
 rev. of Spindle 
 
 .107" 
 
 .118" 
 
 .133" 
 
 .332" 
 
 .236" 
 
 .25" 
 
 Net Weight. 
 
 850 Ibs. 
 
 1550 Ibs. 
 
 1750 Ibs. 
 
 2750 Ibs. 
 
 3590 Ibs. 
 
 5200 Ibs. 
 
 Floor Space. 
 
 49"x36" 
 
 69" x46 ' 
 
 68"x45" 
 
 84"x5l' 
 
 102"x 
 59" 
 
 115"x 
 69" 
 
DIMENSIONS OF PLAIN MILLING MACHINES. 
 
 NO. OF MACHINE. 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 No. prior to 1893. 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 7 
 
 No. of Taper Hole 
 in' Spindle. 
 
 10 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 Distance from Cen- 
 
 
 
 
 
 tre of Spindle to 
 0. H. Arm. 
 
 33-16" 
 
 27-8" 
 
 5 1-2" 
 
 5 9-16" 
 
 Greatest Distance 
 
 
 
 
 
 from End of Spin- 
 dle to Centre in 
 
 
 
 
 
 O. H. Arm. 
 
 93-4" 
 
 11" 
 
 15" 
 
 18" 
 
 Working Surface of 
 Table. 
 
 19"x6" 
 
 27" x8" 
 
 50 5-8" x 10" 
 
 60"xl4 1-2" 
 
 Transverse Move- 
 
 
 
 
 
 ment of Table. 
 
 
 3" 
 
 9" 
 
 12" 
 
 Greatest Distance 
 
 
 
 
 
 from Centre of^ 
 Spindle to Top of' 
 Table. 
 
 7 1-2" 
 
 63-8" 
 
 19" 
 
 17 5-8" 
 
 Length of Auto- 
 matic Feed. 
 
 17 1-2" 
 
 15" 
 
 49" 
 
 60" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 No. of Changes of 
 Feed. 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 Variations in Feed 
 
 
 
 
 
 to one rev. of 
 Spindle. 
 
 .014" to .05 
 
 .015" to .04" 
 
 Oto .10" 
 
 Oto .08" 
 
 Net Weight. 
 
 1600 Ibs. 
 
 2240 Ibs. 
 
 2600 Ibs. 
 
 3700 Ibs. 
 
 Floor Space. 
 
 46"x45" 
 
 47" x 47" 
 
 45- x 110" 
 
 52" x 129" 
 
4 8 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 No. 
 
 16 in. x 4 1-4 in. x 15 in. 
 
 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE. 
 
 The table has an automatic longitudinal feed of 16", a trans- 
 verse movement of 4^", and can be lowered 15" from centre of 
 spindle. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 49 
 
 No. O 
 
 16 in. x 4 1-4 in. x 15 in. 
 
 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE 
 
 With Rack or Screw Feed. 
 
 Screw Feed Machine Patented May 23, 1893. 
 
 The Cut Illustrates the Rack Feed Machine. 
 
 This machine is made with either Screw or Rack Feed, and 
 accordingly has special advantages for tool work or for manu- 
 facturing purposes. With Screw Feed the machine is more con- 
 venient for a tool maker or other operator who wishes to work 
 exactly to a line. The table can be fed by hand to a given point 
 with steadiness and certainty. It is always under absolute con- 
 trol and is practically locked when the feed is disengaged. 
 
 For manufacturing purposes, on the other hand, the machine 
 with Rack Feed is superior, as the position of the table may be 
 much more readily and rapidly changed by hand, and con- 
 sequently time can be saved in various ways, notably, in moving 
 the table for taking work out and placing it in position for the 
 cut. In manufacturing, the power feed is used and the movement 
 of the table is steady and uniform. 
 
 The Spindle has a hole -|f " in diameter its entire length, and 
 runs in bronze boxes provided with means of compensation for 
 wear. For method of adjusting see page 17. The front end is 
 threaded and has a No. 9 taper hole. 
 
 The Cone has 4 steps, the largest 10" diameter, for 2%" belt. 
 
 The Overhanging Arm can be easily reversed to receive an 
 attachment, turned out of the way, or removed. The distance 
 from the centre of the spindle to the arm is 5>^"; greatest 
 distance from end of spindle to centre in arm, io*4"> 
 
5 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 FEED TABLE FOR No. PLAIN MILLING MACHINE. 
 RACK OR SCREW FEED. 
 
 SPI'NDLE 
 SPEEDS 
 
 TRAVEL OF TABLE IN INCHES PER MINUTE. 
 
 90 
 
 _ 
 
 !6 
 
 
 6 16 
 
 225 
 
 10 
 
 360 
 
 13 
 
 4 
 
 lof 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 51 
 
 The Table, including oil pans and channels, is 27" long, 8" 
 wide, has a working surface 2o"x6", 3 T slots y z " wide, a trans- 
 verse movement of 4^", and can be lowered 15" from centre of 
 spindle. 
 
 The Feed of table, 16", is automatic in either direction, and 
 there are 8 changes of feed, obtained by transposing the feed 
 pulleys, page 50, held in place by knurled nuts, varying from 
 .005" to,. 107" to one revolution of spindle. The cone pulley 
 bracket is adjustable, which allows the feed belt to be tightened. 
 
 Adjustable Dials, graduated to read to thousandths of an 
 inch, indicate the transverse and vertical movements of table, 
 and these dials may be adjusted without the aid of wrench or 
 screw-driver. 
 
 The Frame is hollow and fitted as a closet to hold the small 
 parts that accompany the machine. On the left side of the frame 
 there is a pan for holding small tools, etc., and on the front of 
 this there is a rack for wrenches. 
 
 The Vise, with Rack Feed Machine, is. flanged and has jaws 
 4^" wide, if" deep and will open 2". 
 
 The Vise with Screw Feed Machine swivels, and has a grad- 
 uated base. The jaws are 5^" wide, i-J" deep and will 
 open 2 34 ". 
 
 The Counter-Shaft has tight and loose pulleys, 12 "in diam- 
 eter, for 2*^" belts, and should run about 180 revolutions per 
 minute. 
 
 Weight of machine ready for shipment, about 1150 Ibs. 
 
 Net Weight, about 850 Ibs. 
 
 Floor Space, 5o"x36". 
 
 Dimensions of box in which machine is shipped, 39" x 30" x 59*^. 
 
 Each machine is furnished with vise, oil can, collet, wrenches, 
 Treatise on Milling Machines, and everything shown in cut, 
 together with overhead works. 
 
5 2 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 No. 1 
 
 24 in. x 6 1-2 in. x 18 1-2 in. 
 
 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE 
 
 (No. 4, Prior to 1893.) 
 
 The table has an automatic longitudinal feed of 24", a trans- 
 verse movement of 6^", and can be lowered iS l />" from centre 
 of spindle. 
 
1-0 JVr,] 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 53 
 
 No. 1 
 
 24 in. x 6 1 -2 in. x 1 8 1-2 in. 
 
 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE. 
 
 (No. 4, Prior to 1893.) 
 With Rack or Screw Feed. 
 
 Screw Feed Machine Patented May 23, 1893. 
 
 The Cut Illustrates the Screw Feed Machine. 
 
 This machine, when fitted with screw feed, is well adapted for 
 tool room and jobbing use and when fitted with rack feed is well 
 adapted for manufacturing purposes, as the table can be quickly 
 handled for putting on and taking off work. 
 
 This machine will do heavier work than the universal machine 
 of the same size, as the table rests directly upon the knee and the 
 arm supports steady the cutter arbor. 
 
 The Spindle has a hole f ^" in diameter its entire length, and 
 runs in bronze boxes provided with means of compensation for 
 wear. For method of adjusting see page 17. The front end is 
 threaded, and has a No. 10 taper hole. 
 
 The Cone has 4 steps, the largest io%" diameter, for 3" belt. 
 
 The Overhanging Arm has a hole for a centre or for a bear- 
 ing for outer end of arbor, etc. It can be easily reversed to 
 receive an attachment, turned out of the way, or removed. The 
 distance from the centre of the spindle to the arm is 5 y 2 " ; great- 
 est distance from end of spindle to centre in arm, 16". An arm 
 support is furnished and with this in position milling can be 
 done to 13^" from face of column. 
 
 The Table, including oil pans and channels, is 38" long, 10" 
 wide, has a working surface 32^x7^", 3 T slots ffi' wide, a 
 
54 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 FEED TABLE FOR No. I PLAIN MILLING MACHINE. 
 SCREW FEED. 
 
 SPINDLE 
 SPEEDS 
 
 TRAVEL OF TABLE IN INCHES PER MINUTE. 
 
 68 
 
 Jl 
 33 
 
 11 
 
 64 
 
 110 
 
 .9. 
 16 
 
 9 3- 
 y 4 
 
 178 
 
 306 
 
 .15. 
 b !6 
 
 iof 
 
 oil 
 
 3 16 
 
 7.15 
 7 16 
 
 15l 
 
 27l 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 
 FEED TABLE FOR No. 1 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE 
 RACK FEED. 
 
 SPINDLE 
 SPEEDS 
 
 68 
 
 110 
 
 178 
 
 306 
 
 J5. 
 32 
 
 25 
 32 
 
 TRAVEL OF TABLE IN INCHES PER MINUTE. 
 
 it! 
 
 is! 
 
 10' 
 
 23 
 
 13 
 
 21 
 
 36 
 
56 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 transverse movement of 6^", and can be lowered 18^" from 
 centre of spindle. 
 
 The Feed of table, 24", is automatic in either direction, and 
 there are 8 changes of feed, obtained by transposing the feed 
 pulleys, pages 54 and 55, held in place by knurled nuts, varying 
 from .007" to .118" in the rack feed machine and from .005" to 
 .089" in the screw feed machine, to one revolution of spindle. 
 
 Adjustable Dials, graduated to read to thousandths of an 
 inch, indicate the transverse and vertical movements of table, 
 and these dials may be adjusted without the aid of w r rench or 
 screw-driver. 
 
 The Frame is hollow and fitted as a closet to hold the small 
 parts that accompany the machine. On the left side there is a 
 pan for holding small tools, etc., and on the front of this there is a 
 rack for wrenches. 
 
 The Vise, with Rack Feed Machine, is flanged and has jaws 
 5-5-" wide, i^j" deep and opens 2^". 
 
 The Vise, with Screw Feed Machine, swivels and has a grad- 
 uated base. The jaws are 5^" wide, i^g" deep, and will 
 open 2^4". 
 
 The Counter-Shaft has tight and loose pulleys, 14" in diam- 
 eter, for 3^2" belts, and should run about no revolutions per 
 minute. 
 
 Weight of machine ready for shipment, about 2025 Ibs. 
 
 Net Weight, about 1550 Ibs. 
 
 Floor Space, 7o"x45". 
 
 Dimensions of box in which machine is shipped, 46"x59"x33 ff . 
 
 Each machine is furnished with vise, oil can, collet, wrenches, 
 Treatise on Milling Machines, and everything shown in cut, 
 together with overhead works. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 57 
 
 MILLING FACE AND SIDES AT ONE CUT, 
 
58 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 No. 2 
 
 28 in. x 6 1 -2 in. x 1 8 1 -2 in. 
 
 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE, 
 
 With Rack or Screw Feed. 
 
 The table has an automatic longitudinal feed of 28", a trans- 
 verse movement of 6^ /r , and can be lowered i8^"from centre 
 of spindle. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 59 
 
 No. 2 
 
 28 in. x 6 1 -2 in. x 1 8 1 -2 in. 
 
 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE, 
 
 WITH RACK OR SCREW FEED. 
 
 Screw Feed Machine Patented May 23, 1893. 
 
 The Cut Illustrates the Screw Feed Machine. 
 
 The Spindle has a hole f J" in diameter its entire length, and 
 runs in bronze boxes provided with means of compensation for 
 wear. For method of adjusting see page 17. The front end is 
 threaded, and has a No. 10 taper hole. 
 
 The Cone has 3 steps, the largest 10" diameter, for 3" belt, 
 and is back geared, giving six changes of speed. The gears are 
 covered. 
 
 The Overhanging Arm has a hole for a centre, or for a bear- 
 ing for outer end of arbor, etc. It can be easily reversed to 
 receive an attachment, turned out of the way, or removed. The 
 distance from the centre of the spindle to the arm is 5 y 2 " ; great- 
 est distance from end of spindle to centre in arm, is 16". An arm 
 support is furnished and with this in position milling can be 
 done to 13^2" from face of column. 
 
 The Table, including oil pans and channels, is 40" long, 41^." 
 on screw feed machine, 10" wide, has a working surface 34" x 10", 
 3 T slots, $/$" wide, a transverse movement of 6^", and can be 
 lowered i8)4" from centre of spindle. 
 
 The Feed of table, 28", is automatic in either direction, and 
 there are 1 2 changes of feed, obtained by transposing the feed 
 pulleys, page 60 and 61, held in place by knurled nuts, varying 
 from .006" to .133" in the rack feed machine and from .005" to 
 .117" in the screw feed machine, to one revolution of spindle. 
 
6o 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 SPIN, 
 
 FEED 
 SHAFT 
 
 FEED TABLE FOR N0.2 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE 
 SCREW FEED. 
 
 INCHES PER MINUTE. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 6l 
 
 FEED TABLE FOR No. 2 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE. 
 RACK FEED. 
 
 SPIN. 
 
 FEED 
 SHAFT 
 
 STUD 
 
 FEED PER 
 REV. OF 
 
 SPINDLE. 
 
 .006 
 
 .010 
 
 .016 
 
 .016 
 
 .020 
 
 .025 
 
 .032 
 
 .011 
 
 .051 
 
 .051 
 
 .080 
 
 .133 
 
 SPINDLE 
 SPEEDS 
 
 32 
 
 52 
 
 85 
 
 126 
 
 203 
 
 330 
 
 TRAVEL OF TABLE IN INCHES PER MINUTE. 
 
 16 
 
 I 
 
 t 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 i 
 
 - 
 16 
 
 10* 
 
 10 
 
 181 
 
 26 
 
 A 15 
 b !6 
 
 16 
 
 27 
 
 44 
 
62 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 Adjustable Dials, graduated to read to thousandths of an inch, 
 indicate the transverse and vertical movements of table. 
 
 The Frame is hollow and fitted as a closet to hold the small 
 parts that accompany the machine. On the left side of the frame 
 there is. a pan for holding small tools, etc., and on the front of 
 this there is a rack for wrenches. 
 
 The Vise, with Rack Feed Machine, is flanged and has jaws 
 6%" wide, iy^" deep and opens 3^3". 
 
 The Vise, with Screw Feed Machine, swivels and has a 
 graduated base. The ja\vs are 5^" wide, i^" deep, and will 
 open 2^4". 
 
 The Counter-Shaft has tight and loose pulleys, 14" in diam- 
 eter, for 3^/2'' belts, and should run about 180 revolutions per 
 minute. 
 
 Weight of machine ready for shipment, about 2225 Ibs. 
 
 Net Weight, about 1750 Ibs. 
 
 Floor Space, Rack Feed Machine, 68"x45"; Screw Feed 
 Machine, 7Q // X45 // . 
 
 Dimensions of box in which machine is shipped, 50" x 34" x 62 ". 
 
 Each machine is furnished with vise, oil can, collet, wrenches, 
 Treatise on Milling Machines, and everything shown in cut, 
 together with overhead works. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 MILLING TABLE WAYS IN BED. 
 
64 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 No. 3 
 
 34 in. x 7 in. x 19 3-4 in. 
 
 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE. 
 
 The table has an automatic longitudinal feed of 34", a trans- 
 verse movement of 7", and can be lowered 19^" from centre of 
 spindle. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 65 
 
 No. 3 
 
 34 in. x 7 in. x 19 3-4 in. 
 
 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE. 
 
 When desired, we furnish this machine fitted with an oil pump. 
 When so fitted the oil channels are larger and a tank is pro- 
 vided. 
 
 The Spindle has a hole ^ " in diameter its entire length, and 
 runs in bronze boxes provided with means of compensation for 
 wear. For method of adjustment see page 17. The front end 
 is threaded, and has a No. 1 1 taper hole. 
 
 The Cone has 3 steps, the largest n" diameter, for 3^" belt, 
 and is back geared, giving, with two speeds of counter-shaft, 12 
 changes of speed'. The gears are covered. 
 
 The Overhanging Arm has a hole for a centre, or for a bear- 
 ing for outer end of arbor, etc. It can be easily reversed to 
 receive an attachment, turned out of the way, or removed. The 
 distance from the centre of the spindle to the arm is 6^"; great- 
 est distance from end of spindle to centre in arm, 21". An arm 
 support is furnished and with this in position milling can be 
 done to 15^" from face of column. 
 
 The Table, including oil pans and channels, is 50" long, 12" 
 wide, 13^" when fitted with oil pump, has a working surface 
 42" xi 2", 3 T slots, $/%" wide, a transverse movement of 7", 6" 
 when fitted with oil pump, and can be lowered 19%" f rom centre 
 of spindle. 
 
 The Feed of table, 34", is automatic in either direction, and 
 there are 16 changes of feed, obtained by transposing the feed 
 pulleys, page 66, held in place by knurled nuts, varying from 
 .004" to .332" to one revolution of spindle. 
 
66 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 FEED TABLE FOR NO. 3 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE. 
 
 .004 
 
 006 
 
 009 .013.018 .019 .027 .030.040 .045.063 .068 .095 
 
 142 
 
 .212 
 
 332 
 
 SPINDLE 
 SPEEDS 
 
 TRAVEL OF TABLE IN INCHES PER MINUTE. 
 
 23 
 
 16 
 
 1* 
 
 n-3_ 
 2 16 
 
 30 
 
 I 
 
 10 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 ql 
 
 O 4. 
 
 10 
 
 78. 
 
 7 16 
 
 44 
 
 9l 
 
 52 
 
 A 
 
 Q 9 
 3 I6 
 
 rr 
 
 7s 
 
 11 
 
 17* 
 
 68 
 
 1 
 
 - 5. 
 J-16 
 
 3nr 
 
 127 
 
 i| 
 
 18 
 
 27 
 
 42 
 
 164 
 
 
 It 
 
 
 lit 
 
 15f 
 
 34 
 
 189 
 
 4. 
 
 H 
 
 18 
 
 26| 
 
 40 
 
 62| 
 
 244 
 
 M 
 
 i 
 
 ii 
 
 . 
 M 
 
 11 
 
 81 
 
 288 
 
 
 i 
 
 e 3 
 5 IB 
 
 
 
 19 
 
 27 
 
 41 
 
 61 
 
 371 
 
 it 
 
 3ft 
 
 10 
 
 78i 
 
 123 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
68 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 Adjustable Dials, graduated to read to thousandths of an inch, 
 indicate the transverse and vertical movements of table. 
 
 The Frame is hollow and fitted as a closet to hold the small 
 parts that accompany the machine. On the left side there is a 
 pan for holding small tools, etc., and on the front of this there 
 is a rack for wrenches. 
 
 The Vise is Hanged and has jaws 6^5" wide, i T V' deep, and 
 will open 3!". 
 
 The Oil Pump and Fittings, and method of attaching the same 
 are shown in Fig. 18. The pump A is driven by the pulley B 
 from the pulley on the bracket C, which is in turn driven from a 
 pulley on the counter-shaft. The oil is pumped to and through 
 the distributing pipe D and returns through the conductor E and 
 flexible tube F to the tank G. A relief valve H is supplied, which 
 allows the pump to be run continuously. 
 
 The Counter-Shaft has two tight and loose pulleys, 14" and 
 18" in diameter, for 4" belts, and should run about 200 and 155 
 revolutions per minute. 
 
 Weight of machine ready for shipment, about 3275 Ibs ; with 
 Oil Pump, 3380 Ibs. 
 
 Net Weight, about 2710 ; with Oil Pump, 2800 Ibs. 
 
 Floor Space, 8 4 "x5i". 
 
 Dimensions of box in which machine is shipped, 56"x32 f 'x 66". 
 
 Each machine is furnished with vise, oil can, collet, wrenches, 
 Treatise on Milling Machines, and everything shown in cut, 
 together with overhead works. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 6 9 
 
70 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 No. 4 
 
 42 in. x 8 1-4 in. x 22 in. 
 
 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE 
 
 (No. 6, Prior to 1893.) 
 
 The table has an automatic longitudinal feed of 42", a trans- 
 verse movement 8^", and can be lowered 22" from centre of 
 spindle. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 71 
 
 No. 4 
 
 42 in. x 8 1-4 in. x 22 in. 
 
 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE. 
 
 (No 6, Prior to 1893.) 
 
 When desired, we furnish this machine fitted with an oil pump. 
 When so fitted 'the oil channels are larger and a tank is pro- 
 vided. 
 
 The Spindle has a hole Y^" in diameter its entire length, and 
 runs in bronze boxes provided with means of compensation for 
 wear. For method of adjusting see page 17. The front end is 
 threaded, and has a No. 1 1 taper hole. 
 
 The Cone has 3 steps, the largest 13" diameter, for 3^" belt, 
 and is back geared, giving, with two speeds of counter-shaft, 12 
 changes of speed. The gears are inside the column. 
 
 The Overhanging Arm has a hole for a centre, or for a bear- 
 ing for outer end of arbor, etc. It can be easily reversed to 
 receive an attachment, turned out of the way, or removed. The 
 distance from the centre of the spindle to the arm is 7^" ; great- 
 est distance from end of spindle to centre in arm, 26^". An 
 arm support is furnished and with this in position milling can 
 be done to 18^" from face of column. 
 
 The Table, including oil pans and channels, is 60" long, 14" 
 wide, i$ 7 /%" when fitted with oil pump, has a working surface 
 48" xi 4", 3 T slots, 34" wide, a transverse movement of 8^'' ', 
 y-J" when fitted with oil pump, and can be lowered 22" from 
 centre of spindle. 
 
 The Feed of table, 42", is automatic in either direction, and 
 there are 12 changes of feed, obtained by transposing the feed 
 pulleys, page 73, held in place by knurled nuts, varying from 
 .005" to .236" to one revolution of spindle. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. ' CO. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 73 
 
 FEED TABLE FOR NO. 4 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE. 
 
 SPIN. 
 
 FEED 
 SHAFT 
 
 STUD 
 
 
 
 
 FEED PER. 
 REV. OF 
 SPINDLE 
 
 005 .007 .011 .017 .027 .028 .040 .041 .062 .099 .159 .236 
 
 SPINDLE 
 SPEEDS 
 
 TRAVEL OF TABLE IN INCHES PER MINUTE 
 
 14 
 
 o 5 
 
 d !6 
 
 18 
 
 23 
 
 30 
 
 21 
 
 3 
 
 
 32 
 
 39 
 
 16 
 
 if 
 
 50 
 
 if 
 
 
 llf 
 
 112 
 
 IT 
 
 A 15 
 6 16 
 
 " 
 
 17 f 
 
 26 1 
 
 144 
 
 
 15 
 
 23 
 
 34 
 
 186 
 
 
 18 1 
 
 44 
 
 240 
 
 6f 
 
 
 
 23 1 
 
 38 ^ 
 
 56 
 
 310 
 400 
 
 12- 
 
 16 
 
 30 
 
 39 
 
 49 T 
 
 73 
 
74 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 Figure 19 shows a cross section of the table and knee of a 
 Plain Milling Machine. The longitudinal hand feed is through 
 the shaft A, bevel gears B B, and the shaft D, to which the pinion 
 is attached, engaging in the rack E. The power feed is driven 
 from the side through worm and worm gears to a bevel gear, the 
 centre of which is at C, engaging in the bevel gear B, and driven 
 as by hand. A T slot on the back of the table is provided for 
 bolts to hold stops, against which work can be placed when it is 
 desired to locate it from the back of the table, G. 
 
 Adjustable Dials, graduated to read to thousandths of an inch, 
 indicate the transverse and vertical movements of table. 
 
 Oil Pump. For sketch and description of method of applying 
 oil pump see pages 67 and 68. 
 
 The Frame is hollow and fitted as a closet to hold the small 
 parts that accompany the machine. On the left side there is a 
 pan for holding small tools, etc., and on the front of this there is 
 a rack for wrenches. 
 
 The Vise is flanged and has jaws y-J" wide, i^j" deep, and 
 will open 4^". 
 
 The Counter-Shaft has two tight and loose pulleys, 14" and 
 1 8" in diameter, for 4" belts, and should run about 200 and 155 
 revolutions per minute. 
 
 Weight of machine ready for shipment, about 4100 Ibs ; with 
 Oil Pump, 4470 Ibs. 
 
 Net Weight, about 3590 Ibs; with Oil Pump, 3740 Ibs. 
 
 Floor Space, 102" x $9". 
 
 Dimensions of box in which machine is shipped, 62" x 39" x 67". 
 
 Each machine is furnished with vise, oil can, collet, wrenches, 
 Treatise on Milling Machines, and everything shown in cut, 
 together with overhead works. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 75 
 
 , 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 No 5 
 
 48 in. x 9 3-4 in. x 1 9 1 -2 in. 
 
 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE 
 
 (No. 8, Prior to 1893.) 
 
 The table has an automatic longitudinal feed of 48", a trans- 
 verse movement of 9^ /r , and can be lowered 19 /4" from centre 
 of spindle. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 77 
 
 No 5 
 
 48 in. x 9 3-4 in. x 19 1-2 in. 
 
 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE 
 
 (No. 8, Prior to 1893.) 
 
 Patented Oct. 18, 1802. 
 
 When desired, we furnish this machine fitted with an oil pump. 
 When so fitted the oil channels are larger and a tank is pro- 
 vided. 
 
 The Spindle has a hole y^" in diameter its entire length, and 
 runs in bronze boxes provided with means of compensation for 
 wear. The front end has a No. 1 2 taper hole. 
 
 The Cone has 3 steps, the largest 13^" diameter, for 4^" 
 belt, and is back geared, giving, with two speeds of counter-shaft, 
 12 changes of speed. The gears are inside the column. 
 
 The Overhanging Arm has a hole for a centre, or for a bear- 
 ing for outer end of arbor, etc. It can be easily pushed back 
 from the table. The distance from the centre of the spindle to 
 the arm is 8" ; greatest distance from end of spindle to centre in 
 arm, 24". An arm support is furnished, and with this in position, 
 milling can be done to 26" from face of column. 
 
 The Table, including oil pans and channels, is 66^" long, 16" 
 wide, 1 8" when fitted with oil pump, and has a working surface 
 54 // xi6", 3 T slots, y" wide, a transverse movement of 9%", 
 8/i" when fitted with oil pump, and can be lowered 19^" from 
 centre of spindle. 
 
 The Feed of table, 48" is automatic in either direction, and 
 there are 8 changes of feed, obtained by transposing the feed 
 pulleys, held in place by knurled nuts, varying from .023" to .2$" 
 to one revolution of spindle. 
 
78 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 Adjustable Dials, graduated to read to thousandths of an inch, 
 indicate the transverse and vertical movements of table. 
 
 Oil Pump. For sketch and description of method of applying 
 see pages 67 and 68. 
 
 The Frame is hollow and fitted as a closet to hold the small 
 parts that accompany the machine. On the left side there is a 
 pan for holding small tools, etc., and on the front of this there is a 
 rack for wrenches. 
 
 The Vise is flanged and has jaws yj" wide, ifa" deep, and 
 will open 4^". 
 
 The Counter-Shaft has two tight and loose pulleys, 16" and 
 20" in diameter, for 5" belts, and should run about 140 and 112 
 revolutions per minute. 
 
 Weight ready for shipment, 6160 Ibs.; with Oil Pump, 
 6400 Ibs. 
 
 Net Weight, about 5150 Ibs.; with Oil Pump, 5250 Ibs. 
 
 Floor Space, H5"x69". 
 
 Dimensions of boxes in which machine is shipped, 67" x 42" 
 x67" and 66" x 2i"x 21". 
 
 Each machine is provided with vise, oil can, collet, wrenches, 
 Treatise on Milling Machines, and everything shown in cut, 
 together with overhead works. 
 
BROWN A SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 79 
 
 MILLING STEEL MOTOR PINIONS. 
 
8o BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 No. 12 
 
 1 7 1-2 in. x 5-8 in. x 8 in. 
 
 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE. 
 
 (No. 2, Prior to 1893.) 
 
 The table has an automatic longitudinal feed of 17^", the 
 spindle has a transverse adjustment of 5/s", and the greatest dis- 
 tance from centre of spindle to top of table is 8". 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 8 1 
 
 No. 12 
 
 1 7 1 -2 in. x 5-8 in. x 7 1 -2 in. 
 
 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE. 
 
 (No. 2, Prior to 1893.) 
 
 This machine by reason of its rigidity and the ease with which 
 the table can be moved by hand makes it well adapted for the 
 rapid and economical production of many parts of machine 
 tools, bicycles, electrical instruments, guns, etc. 
 
 The Spindle runs in bronze boxes provided with means of com- 
 pensation for wear. It is driven from cone by gear and pinion, 
 has a vertical adjustment by means of nuts placed on a vertical 
 screw, and a transverse adjustment of f". The front end has a 
 No. 10 taper hole. 
 
 The Cone has 3 steps, the largest I2-J" in diameter, for 2^" 
 belt. 
 
 The Overhanging Arm has an adjustable centre support and 
 brace. Distance from centre of spindle to arm, 3 T y'; greatest 
 distance from end of spindle to centre in arm, with arm brace in 
 position, 7^4", without arm brace, 9". 
 
 The Table, including oil pans and channels, is 28" long and 
 10" wide, has a working surface i9"x6", and a T slot f" wide. 
 Greatest distance from centre of spindle to top of table, 7^2", 
 least, 2^". 
 
 The Feed of table, of 17^", is automatic and can be auto- 
 matically released at any point. There are three changes of feed, 
 varying from .014" to .05" to one revolution of spindle. 
 
82 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 In addition to the oil pans and channels surrounding the table, 
 an oil tank is attached to each machine providing for the use of a 
 pump. 
 
 The Vise has jaws 6" wide, i T y deep and will open 3$". 
 
 The Counter-Shaft has tight and loose pulleys 10" in diam- 
 eter for 3" belts, and should run about 280 revolutions per 
 minute. 
 
 Weight of machine ready for shipment; about 1950 Ibs. 
 
 Net Weight, about 1600 Ibs. 
 
 Floor Space, 4 6"x45 / '. 
 
 Dimensions of box in which machine is shipped, 43" x 34" x 57". 
 
 Each machine is provided with vise, oil can, wrenches, Treatise 
 on Milling Machines, and everything shown in cut, together with 
 overhead works. 
 
 MILLING TABLE WAYS. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 No. 12 
 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE. 
 
 J 
 
 Arranged for Sprocket Wheel Cutting. 
 
84 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 MACHINES FOR BICYCLE WORK, 
 
 Development of the bicycle manufacturing business has called 
 for a great variety of machines specially adapted for bicycle 
 work. 
 
 On page 83 is shown our No. 12 Plain Milling Machine, 
 described in detail on pages 81 and 82, fitted with single dial 
 index centres. By this method gangs of sprocket wheels can be 
 placed upon arbors, and by using a cutter specially made for the 
 purpose two teeth can be cut at one time. 
 
 The Index Plate is provided with hardened steel taper bush- 
 ings, and is covered, thus protecting the holes from dirt. A hard- 
 ened steel taper pin is forced into the bushing by a spring, and 
 can be released by a lever, when the work can be rotated by a 
 hand wheel, thus making the indexing very rapid. While the 
 plates can be used, usually, for other than the number of teeth 
 for which they are made, it is desirable to have them contain 
 holes for the actual number of teeth to be cut, as mistakes can 
 then be avoided. 
 
 The Foot-Stock is provided with a bearing instead of a centre, 
 which gives the arbor a firm support. 
 
 Gangs of sprockets from 6" to 7" long can be milled. 
 
 If single cutters are used, cutting one tooth at a time, a set of 
 four cutters will cut 7, 8, 17, 18, 19 and 20-tooth sprockets. 
 
 We also show on page 85 the same machine fitted for cutting 
 chain centres. By means of a special holding device, a number of 
 these centres can be cut at one time, the number being limited by 
 the size of the chain and the distance between the face of the 
 spindle and the centre in the arm. 
 
 Other operations can be profitably done on some of the other 
 machines described in the preceding pages. 
 
 By consultation with those interested in bicycle manufac- 
 ture, many methods may be designed by which the work may be 
 greatly facilitated. 
 
BROWN & SHARP E MFG. CO. 
 
 NO. 12 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE ARRANGED FOR CUTTING 
 BICYCLE CHAIN CENTRES. 
 
86 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 No- 13 
 
 1 5 in. x 3 in. x 6 3-8 in. 
 
 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE 
 
 (No. 3, Prior to 1893.) 
 
 The table has an automatic longitudinal feed of 15", a trans- 
 verse movement of 3", and the greatest distance from centre of 
 spindle to top of table is 6^". 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 87 
 
 No. 13 
 
 15 in. x3in. x6 3-8 in. 
 
 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE. 
 
 (No. 3, Prior to 1893.) 
 
 This machine combines power and rigidity with ease of 
 handling, making it especially valuable in milling the heavier cuts 
 on bicycle and sewing machine parts and other work of this 
 class. 
 
 The Spindle runs in boxes provided with means of compensa- 
 tion for wear. It is driven from cone by gear and pinion and 
 has a vertical adjustment by means of nuts placed on a vertical 
 screw. The front end has a No. 10 taper hole. 
 
 The Cone has 3 steps, the largest 13" in diameter, for 3" 
 belt. 
 
 The Overhanging Arm has an adjustable centre support and 
 an arm brace. Distance from centre of spindle to arm, 2^"; 
 greatest distance from end of spindle to centre in arm, 1 1 ". 
 
 The Table, including oil pans and channels, is 31^2" long 
 and 10^" wide, has a working surface 27 "x 8", 2 T slots y^' f 
 wide and a transverse movement of 3". Greatest distance from 
 centre of spindle to top of table, 6^"; least, 3^ ". 
 
 The Feed of table, of 15", is automatic and can be auto- 
 matically released at any point. It is a screw feed and can be 
 quickly returned by hand. There are three changes of feed, 
 varying from .015" to .04" to one revolution of spindle. 
 
 In addition to the oil pans and channels surrounding the table, 
 an oil tank is attached to each machine providing for the use of a 
 pump. 
 
88 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 The Vise has jaws 6^" wide, i T y deep, and will open 3^". 
 
 The Counter-Shaft has tight and loose pulleys 10" in diam- 
 eter for 3}^" belt, and should run about 375 revolutions per 
 minute. 
 
 Weight of machine ready for shipment, about 2650 Ibs. 
 
 Net Weight, about 2240 Ibs. 
 
 Floor Space, 47"x5o". 
 
 Dimensions of box in which machine is shipped, 50" x 38" x 59". 
 
 Each machine is furnished with vise, oil can, wrenches, Treatise 
 on Milling Machines, and everything shown in cut, together with 
 overhead works. 
 
 PLAIN MILLING. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 8 9 
 
 MILLING CARRIAGE WAY- 
 
 m m 
 
 MILLING HANGER COXES. 
 
9 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 No. 23 
 
 49 in. x 9 in. x 19 in. 
 
 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE 
 
 (No. 5, Prior to 1893.) 
 
 The table has an automatic feed of 49", the head has a trans- 
 verse movement of 9", and the table can be lowered 19" from 
 centre of spindle. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 91 
 
 No. 23 
 
 49 in. x 9 in. x 19 in. 
 
 PLAIN MILLING MACHINE. 
 
 (No. 5, Prior to 1893.) 
 
 This machine is especially adapted for work requiring large 
 table capacity and long cuts. 
 
 The Spindle is hollow, runs in bronze boxes provided with 
 means of compensation for wear, and is driven by a worm and 
 worm gear. The worm is of steel, hardened, and the worm gear 
 of bronze. The worm gear runs in oil. The front end of spindle 
 is threaded and has a No. 1 1 taper hole. 
 
 The Cone has 3 steps, the largest iof6" in diameter, for 2*4" 
 belt, and with two speeds of counter gives 6 changes of speed. 
 
 The Head has a transverse movement of 9". 
 
 The Overhanging Arm can be removed or turned out of the 
 way. Distance from centre of spindle to arm, 5^"; greatest 
 distance from end of spindle to centre in arm, 15". A lon^ and 
 a short arm support are furnished and with one of these in pos'.hon 
 milling can be done to 15" from face of column. 
 
 The Table, including oil pans and channels, is 59" long and 
 10" wide, has a working surface 5of"x 10", 3 T slots, y^" wide 
 and can be lowered 19" from centre of spindle. 
 
 The Feed of table, of 49", is automatic in either direction and 
 can be automatically released at any point. It is driven by a 
 friction disk with connections that automatically adjust themselves 
 to any position of head and knee, and can be quickly changed 
 from o to .10" to one revolution of spindle. 
 
 Dials graduated to read to i6ths, 32nds, etc., and to thou- 
 sandths of an inch indicate the transverse movement of head and 
 vertical movement of table. 
 
9 2 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 The Vise is flanged and has jaws 7^" wide, 1/6" deep, and 
 will open 4J^". 
 
 The Counter-Shaft has tight and loose pulleys 10" and 14" in 
 diameter for 3" and 3/4" belts, and should run about 450 and 
 300 revolutions per minute. 
 
 Weight of machine ready for shipment, about 3100 Ibs. 
 
 Net Weight, about 2600 Ibs. 
 
 Floor Space, 45 / 'xiio". 
 
 Dimensions of box in which machine is shipped, 50" x 37" x 65". 
 
 Each machine is furnished with vise, oil can, collet, wrenches, 
 Treatise on Milling Machines, and everything shown in cut, 
 together with overhead works. 
 
 MILLING T SLOTS IN TABLE. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 93 
 
 No. 24 
 
 6O in. x 12 in. x 17 5-8 in, and 
 72in.x 12 in. x 17 5-8 in. 
 
 PLAIN MILLING MACHINES. 
 
 (No. 7, Prior to 1893.) 
 
 The No. 24 Plain Milling Machine is similar in general design 
 and construction to the No. 23 Plain Milling Machine. All the 
 parts are larger and heavier, however, and thus greater capacity 
 and efficiency are obtained. 
 
 The Spindle is hollow, runs in bronze boxes provided with 
 means of compensation for wear, and is driven by a worm and 
 worm gear. The worm is of steel, hardened, and the worm gear 
 of bronze. The worm gear runs in oil. The front end of spindle 
 is threaded and has a No. 1 2 taper hole. 
 
 The Cone has 3 steps, the largest 12" in diameter, for 3" belt, 
 and with two speeds of counter, gives 6 changes of speed. 
 
 The Head has a transverse movement of 12". 
 
 The Overhanging Arm can be removed or turned out of the 
 way. Distance from centre of spindle to arm, 5 T 9 " ; greatest 
 distance from end of spindle to centre in arm, 18". A long and 
 short arm support are furnished, and with one of these in position 
 milling can be done to 17-3-" from face of column. 
 
 The Table, including oil pans and channels, is 69" long and 
 14^" wide, has a working surface 60" x 14^", 5 T slots y^" wide, 
 and can be lowered lyf" below the centre of spindle. 
 
 The Feed of table, of 60", is automatic in either direction. It 
 is driven by a friction disk with connections that automatically 
 adjust themselves to any position of head and knee, and can be 
 quickly changed from o to .08" to one revolution of spindle. 
 
94 BROWN A SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 Dials graduated to read to i6ths, 32nds, etc., and to thou- 
 sandths of an inch indicate the transverse movement of head and 
 vertical movement of table. 
 
 The Vise is flanged and has jaws y-J" wide, iJ/%" deep, and 
 will open 4^-". 
 
 The Counter-Shaft has tight and loose pulleys 12" and 18" in 
 diameter for 3^" and 4^-" belts, and should run about 300 and 
 200 revolutions per minute. 
 
 Weight of machine ready for shipment, about 4325 Ibs. 
 
 Net Weight, about 3700 Ibs. 
 
 Floor Space, 52 "x 129". 
 
 Dimensions of box in which machine is shipped, 63" x 39" x 67". 
 
 This machine is also furnished with table 72" long. 
 
 Weight of machine ready for shipment, about 4700 Ibs. 
 
 Net Weight, about 3950 Ibs. 
 
 Floor Space, 52" x 153". 
 
 Dimensions of boxes in which machine with this table is 
 shipped, 57" x 51 "x 68" and 77"xi9"x8". 
 
 Each machine is furnished with vise, oil can, collet, wrenches, 
 Treatise on Milling Machines, and overhead works. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 No. 2 
 
 41 in. x 12 in. x 1 5 in. 
 
 Vertical Spindle Milling Machine, 
 A 
 
 95 
 
 This machine has a longitudinal feed of 41" and a transverse 
 feed of 12". Greatest distance from end of spindle to table, 15". 
 
96 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 No. 2 
 
 41 in. x 12 in. x 15 in. 
 
 VERTICAL SPINDLE MILLING 
 MACHINE. 
 
 This machine, for many kinds of work, is preferable to a ma- 
 chine with a horizontal spindle. The operator can more easily 
 see the work and more readily follow any irregularity in the outline 
 of the surface to be milled. All the movements of the table are 
 controlled from the front of the machine. 
 
 The Spindle runs in bronze boxes provided with means of 
 compensation for wear. It is back geared and has, with two 
 speeds of counter, 12 changes of speed. It has a No. n taper 
 hole. The arbors can be held by a bolt passing through the 
 spindle. 
 
 The Cone has 3 steps for 3" belt, and can be set parallel with, 
 or at right angles to the bed. 
 
 The Vertical Adjustment of 13^" is obtained by raising or 
 lowering the column ; a fine adjustment of i T V is obtained by 
 means of a collar nut that is graduated to read to thousandths of 
 an inch. The greatest distance, from end of spindle to top of 
 table, is", the least, itf". 
 
 Distance from centre of spindle to column, 13^2". 
 
 The Table, including oil pans and channels, is 53" long and 
 16" wide, has a working surface 41" x 13%", 3 T slots %" wide. 
 
 The Feeds of table are automatic in either direction. The 
 longitudinal feed is 41" and the transverse feed is 12", and both 
 can be automatically released at any point. There are 8 changes 
 of feed for each direction varying from .006" to .056" to one 
 revolution of the spindle. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 97 
 
 The Counter-shaft has friction pulleys 12" and 16" in diam- 
 eter for 3^" and 4" belts, and should run about 220 and 165 
 revolutions per minute. 
 
 Weight of machine ready for shipment, about 5250 Ibs. 
 
 Net Weight, about 4400 Ibs. 
 
 Floor Space, ioo"xy8". 
 
 Dimensions of box in which each machine is shipped, 69" x 45'' 
 x8 3 ". 
 
 Each machine is furnished with collet, oil can and stand, 
 wrenches, Treatise on Milling Machines, and overhead works. 
 
 CIRCULAR MILLING ATTACHMENT. 
 
 This Attachment, for the No, 2 Vertical Spindle Milling Machine, 
 is of service in milling circles, segments cf circles, circular slots, 
 etc., on plain and irregularly shaped pieces. It is bolted to the 
 table of the machine and when so placed can be adjusted to any 
 desired position. 
 
 By the addition of this attachment, the machine is fully equipped 
 to do all varieties of straight and circular milling within its capac- 
 ity. 
 
 The Table is 
 
 in diameter and has 6 T slots 
 
 wide. 
 
 The Feed of table is automatic and can be automatically re- 
 leased at any point. There are 8 changes of feed. 
 
 The Attachment is 4^" high. 
 
 Weight ready for shipment, about 325 Ibs. 
 
 Net Weight, about 250 Ibs. 
 
 Each Attachment is furnished with bracket and pulleys for 
 attaching it to the machine. 
 
9 8 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 GEAR CUTTING ATTACHMENT. 
 
 For No. 1 Universal Milling Machine, Design Prior 
 to 1895. 
 
 This attachment is for use in cutting gear wheels, and wheels 
 larger and heavier than can be cut with the ordinary apparatus 
 belonging to the No. i Universal Milling Machine, design prior 
 to 1895. It swings 14", and is furnished with a 20" index plate 
 containing 4294 holes. It will divide all numbers to 75, and all 
 even numbers to 150. Arbors fitted to the No. i Universal 
 Milling Machine can be used in this attachment. The screw 
 with set nuts over the spindle is designed as a support for the 
 wheel while being cut. Weight, boxed, 440 Ibs. 
 
 The Head and Foot-Stock of this attachment can be fitted for 
 use upon the Nos. i, design of 1895, 2, 3 and 4, design of 1893, 
 Universal, and the Nos. i, 2, 3, 4, 5, 23 and 24 Plain Milling 
 Machines. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 99 
 
 VERTICAL SPINDLE MILLING 
 ATTACHMENTS. 
 
 For Nos. 1,2,3 and 4 Universal, and Nos. 1 , 2, and 3, 
 Plain Milling Machines. 
 
 These attachments are used for a large range of light milling, 
 and are of special advantage for key-seating, die-sinking, cutting 
 T slots, spiral gears or worms, sawing stock when in lengths 
 greater than can be placed at right angles to the table, etc. 
 
 The holder or frame is secured to the overhanging arm, and 
 the horizontal shaft is inserted in the cone spindle of the machine. 
 The vertical spindle is driven by the horizontal shaft through 
 spiral gears. 
 
 The spindle can be set at any angle from a vertical to a hori- 
 zontal position. The position is indicated on the base of spindle 
 head which is graduated. 
 
 Machine on which at- 
 tachment is used, 
 Taper Hole in Spindle, 
 
 Nos. i & 2 Univ. 
 Nos. i & 2 Plain. 
 
 7 
 
 Nos. 3 &: 4 Univ. 
 No. 3 Plain. 
 9 
 
100 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 VERTICAL SPINDLE MILLING ATTACHMENT ARRANGED TO SAW OFF 
 
 STOCK. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 101 
 
102 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 VERTICAL SPINDLE MILLING 
 ATTACHMENTS 
 
 For Nos. 4 and 5 Plain and No. 4, Design 1893, Uni- 
 versal Milling Machines. 
 
 
 The holder or frame is secured to the frame of the machine, 
 and the horizontal shaft is inserted in the spindle of the machine. 
 
 The vertical spindle is driven by the horizontal shaft through 
 bevel gears. 
 
 The spindle can be- set at any angle from a vertical to a hori- 
 zontal position. The position is indicated on the base of spindle 
 head, which is graduated. 
 Machine on which Attach- ) No. 4 Plain and No. 4 No. 5, Plain. 
 
 ment is used. ) Univ. Design 1893. 
 
 Taper Hole in Spindle, 9 1 1 
 
 Distance from Centre of) ^i/, j n> It i n 
 
 spindle to Column, > 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 103 
 
 VERTICAL SPINDLE MILLING 
 ATTACHMENT 
 
 For No. 24 Plain Milling Machines. 
 
 The holder or frame is secured to the overhanging arm, and 
 the vertical spindle is driven by a worm and a worm wheel by a 
 belt from cone of the machine. 
 
 On certain classes of work two cuts can be made simulta- 
 neously, one by a cutter on the arbor in the spindle of the 
 machine, the other by a mill in the vertical spindle of the attach- 
 ment. 
 
 HIGH SPEED MILLING ATTACHMENT 
 AND DRIVING FIXTURE 
 
 For Nos. 1 and 2 Universal and 1 and 2 Plain Milling 
 
 Machines. 
 
 The cut on the left represents the High Speed Milling Attach- 
 ment, which is of service for light or finishing cuts with end mills, 
 and consists of a small collet or spindle running in a hardened 
 shell that fits the hole in the cone spindle of the machine. It can 
 
104 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 DRIVING FIXTURE FOR HIGH SPEED MILLING ATTACHMENT. 
 Method of Using when a Quick Feed is required for the Table. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 105 
 
 be driven directly from an extra pulley on the counter-shaft, and 
 thus small mills may be run much faster than the usual speed of 
 the cone spindle. When the attachment is thus driven, the cone 
 pulley is stationary. 
 
 The cut on the right represents the Driving Fixture, which 
 consists of a cast iron arm that can be readily placed in a milling 
 machine, in the place of the overhanging arm, and can be applied 
 without additional overhead works. 
 
 There is a shaft running in the upper end that has a pulley on 
 each end of it. The pulley on the back is to be belted to the 
 front step of the cone of the machine. The front pulley is to be 
 belted to the fixture that is to be placed in the taper hole of the 
 spindle. 
 
 The advantage of this method of driving is that the steps of the 
 cone pulley are free to be run in the usual manner, and thus dif- 
 ferent speeds can be obtained for the end mill. 
 
 On the No. i Universal and No. i Plain Milling Machine there 
 are 4 changes of speed, from 342 to 1537 revolutions per minute, 
 and on the No. 2 Universal and No. 2 Plain Milling Machines 
 there are 3 changes of speed, from 603 to 1584 revolutions per 
 minute. 
 
106 BROWN A SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 HAND MILLING ATTACHMENT 
 
 For No. O Plain Milling Machine. 
 
 The No. o Plain Milling Machine can be quickly changed by 
 means of this attachment into a hand milling machine with or 
 without an automatic longitudinal feed. 
 
 An apron, placed on the outside end of the knee, carries a lever 
 attached to a segment of a gear which runs in a pinion placed 
 over the end of the shaft that moves the table longitudinally, and 
 this lever when moved turns the shaft as the crank would if it 
 were in position. 
 
 The attachment, with a knee having a working surface of 6" x 
 5 y^ ", is clamped on the table and on this the fixtures for holding 
 the work can be fastened as on a hand milling machine. When 
 brought to position the lever can be held by the catch in the 
 holder, shown at the left of the cut, which can be released by a 
 latch on the back of the lever, so that at the same time that the 
 knee is returned to position the catch is released without an extra 
 movement. While the lever is held down, the feed can be thrown 
 in and milling done as on a plain milling machine. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 107 
 
 The top of the knee at its lowest position is 6" from the top of 
 the table and can be raised 2". 
 
 With this attachment in position the milling machine table has 
 a transverse feed of 2%". The longitudinal feed of the table by 
 means of the lever and gear segment is 4", but with these 
 removed the machine will feed 16" automatically. 
 
 TAPER MILLING ATTACHMENT 
 
 For Nos. 1 and 2 Universal Milling Machines. 
 
 This attachment is designed to facilitate the milling of taper 
 work. By reason of its easy and quick adjustment to the desired 
 taper it is especially desirable when a large variety of such work 
 is to be done. 
 
 It consists of a table that is suspended on a ring, which in turn 
 is placed on an arbor to fit the taper hole in the spiral head. The 
 head can be set to any desired angle to 10, and the table will 
 take the same position, keeping the centres always in line. 
 When placed at the required angle it is held in position by a 
 clamp screw that slides in a knee clamped to the table of the 
 machine. By reason of the location of the clamps and the solid- 
 ity of the table, work is held as firmly between the centres of this 
 attachment as they are between centres fastened directly to the 
 table. 
 
 The foot-stock of the attachment slides in a T slot $/% " wide, 
 and can be placed to take in work to 4^ " in diameter and 17" in 
 length. 
 
 In ordering state whether it is to be used on the No. i or No. 2 
 Universal Milling Machine. 
 
io8 
 
 BROWN A SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 INDEX HEAD AND CENTRES WITH 
 CENTRE REST. 
 
 PATENTED FEBRUARY 5, 1884. 
 
 These Centres are designed for use on Milling Machines, but 
 the strength, stiffness and stability of the Index head in all 
 posifions enable it also to be advantageously used on Planers, 
 Upright Drills and Slotting Machines. 
 
 The Centres swing 12^" in diameter. 
 
 The Head can be set at any angle from 10 degrees below the 
 horizontal to 10 degrees beyond the perpendicular. 
 
 The Spindle is provided with a face plate and adjustable dog 
 carrier. The front end has a No. 1 2 taper hole. The straight 
 hole at end of taper is 1*2" in diameter. 
 
 The Worm Wheel is 6" in diameter, and one revolution is 
 made by 60 revolutions of index crank. 
 
 The Index Plates divide all numbers to 100, all even numbers 
 to 134, and all divisible by 4 to 200. 
 
 The Table is provided with flanges, is 32" long, 8" wide, and 
 has 3 T slots % " wide. 
 
 Combined Length of head and foot-stocks, 18". 
 
 Centre Rest will take work to 3^" in diameter. 
 
 Weight, about 350 Ibs. 
 
 Table, index plates and tables explaining the use of same, 
 wrenches and everything shown in cut are sent with each pair of 
 centres. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 109 
 
 8 in. and 6 7-8 in. SINGLE DIAL 
 INDEX CENTRES. 
 
 These Index Centres are intended for use on milling or other 
 machines where a limited amount of indexing is to be done, as in 
 cutting teeth in sprocket wheels or mills, or in milling nuts, etc. 
 
 Two sizes are made, one taking in work to 8" in diameter and 
 the other to 6 y%" in diameter. 
 
 The Spindles are threaded on the ends. The 8" spindle has a 
 No. 10 taper hole and the 6j4" spindle a No. 1 1 taper hole. The 
 6 7^" centres are especially designed for use in milling sprocket 
 wheels in gangs and provision is made for a stiff arbor. 
 
 The Index Plate is- a dial provided with hardened steel bush- 
 ings, and is covered, thus protecting the holes from dirt. A hard- 
 ened steel taper pin is forced into the bushing by a spring, and 
 can be released by a lever, when the work can be rotated by a 
 hand wheel, thus making the indexing very rapid. While the 
 plates can be used, usually, for other than the number of teeth 
 for which they are made, it is desirable to have them contain 
 holes for the number of teeth to be cut, as mistakes can thus be 
 avoided. 
 
 The Dial furnished with the centres has 16 holes. Special 
 dials, with any number of holes to 25, made to order. 
 
 The Tongues and Bolts furnished, fit a T slot 5/ 8 " wide. 
 
 Combined Length of head and foot-stocks, 17^2". 
 
 Wrench, bolts and clamps are furnished with these centres. 
 
110 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 10 INCH INDEX CENTRES. 
 
 These centres enable one to do all of the dividing and indexing 
 work that can be done on a Universal Milling Machine, excepting 
 the cutting of spirals, or of work that has to be held at an angle 
 to the centre line of the centres. 
 
 The Centres swing io%" in diameter. 
 
 The Spindle is threaded on front and has a No. i o taper hole. 
 The straight hole at end of taper i -f^" in diameter. 
 
 The Worm Wheel is 6*4" in diameter, and one revolution is 
 made by 40 revolutions of index crank. It has 24 holes on rim, 
 and when the worm is disengaged direct indexing can be done. 
 The wheel is held by means of an index pin. 
 
 The Index Plates are the same that are used on the No. i 
 Universal Milling Machine. 
 
 The Head-Stock can be clamped at any angle on table. 
 
 The Tongues and Bolts furnished, fit a T slot 5/ 8 " wide. The 
 tongues are inserted. 
 
 Combined Length of head and foot-stocks, 
 
 12 INCH INDEX CENTRES. 
 
 These Centres are of the same general design as the 10" Index 
 Centres described above. 
 
 The Centres swing 1 2 % " in diameter. 
 
 The Worm Wheel is 7 ^ " in diameter. 
 
 The Tongues and Bolts furnished, fit a T slot ^ " wide. 
 
 Combined Length of head and foot-stocks, 16^". 
 
 Index Plates and tables explaining the use of same and 
 wrenches are sent with each pair of Centres. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 Ill 
 
 TOOL-MAKERS' UNIVERSAL VISE. 
 
 This vise is of an entirely new design, for use on Milling 
 Machines or Planers, and is so constructed that it can be set at 
 any angle to the surface of the table or to the spindle of the 
 machine, and rigidly clamped in position. 
 
 The base is double, the upper portion is graduated, and can be 
 set at any angle in a horizontal plane. On top of the swivel base 
 is a hinged knee, which can be set at any angle, to 90, in a 
 vertical plane. The top of the knee is graduated. The knee is 
 clamped rigidly in position by means of the nut on end of bolt 
 forming hinge, and the locking levers shown at the left of cut, 
 these levers are clamped in position by the bolt shown in centre 
 and the bolts at the ends of the levers. 
 
 The vise proper is fastened to the hinged knee in such a man- 
 ner that it can be set at any angle on a horizontal plane, and can 
 be clamped in position by the bolt which holds the upper locking 
 lever. 
 
 The vise base is fastened to the table by means of two bolts fit- 
 ting into the table T slot. The base is provided with two sets of 
 holes to allow for moving the vise, when set in a vertical plane, in 
 order to clear the Milling Machine spindle. 
 
 The jaws are made of tool steel and hardened, are 5^" wide, 
 ij^" deep and will open 2^". 
 
112 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
BROWN A SHARPE MFG. CO. 113 
 
 MATERIAL, WORKMANSHIP, DESIGN, ETC. 
 
 Our machines are made with the intention that they 
 shall be the best of their respective classes. Materials 
 are used which experience has shown are the most 
 suitable for the various parts, and careful attention is 
 constantly given to insure good workmanship. 
 
 Our buildings are modern and specially arranged 
 for the business. The machinery and appliances are 
 the best attainable. Our machines are manufactured in 
 large quantities with expensive special tools, and much 
 greater accuracy has been obtained than can be reached 
 by the usual methods of manufacturing. All plane bear- 
 ings are scraped to surface plates ; all cylindrical bear- 
 ings are ground and fitted to standards. The alignments 
 are correct. The machines are subjected to thorough 
 inspection and when deemed necessary, to actual opera- 
 tion before being packed. 
 
 The general design of our Universal Milling Machines 
 has, for thirty years, been appreciated by mechanical 
 experts, and faithfully imitated by almost every one who 
 has desired to enter upon the manufacture of Milling 
 Machines. The design of the Plain Machines, in the main 
 features, is similar to that of the Universal Machines. 
 The distinguishing features of the Nos. 12 and 13 Plain 
 Milling Machines are the rapidity with which they can be 
 operated ; and their convenience for setting and removing 
 the work. They are also unusually stiff for their size and 
 weight. 
 
 We are constantly endeavoring to improve the ma- 
 chines, and from time to time modify the details, and for 
 this reason we suggest that our catalogue be frequently 
 consulted, as all changes are there most speedily brought 
 to the attention of the public. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 FORMED CUTTER. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 115 
 
 CARE AND USE OF MILLING MACHINES. 
 
 The Machines should be placed upon a level, and if 
 possible, a solid floor or foundation. The Universal and 
 several of the Plain Machines should not be set where 
 the screw which raises and lowers the knee will come 
 directly over a beam ; for there must be room for this 
 screw below the base of the machine in order that the 
 knee may reach its lowest position. 
 
 The counter-shafts are generally placed over the 
 
 j r Counter- 
 
 machines, but if necessary the position of the cone and shafts. 
 
 other pulleys may be changed. 
 
 The shippers are most convenient when on the left 
 side of the machines. 
 
 To find the diameter of pulley required to run the Diameter 
 
 J Pulley on 
 
 counter-shaft at a given speed : multiply the speed of Main Line 
 counter-shaft by the diameter of pulley on the same, 
 and divide the product by the speed of main, or driving 
 shaft. 
 
 It is sometimes best to vary the speed of counter- Speed of 
 shafts from those given in our catalogue. In our own shafts, 
 works some counter-shafts belonging to No. i Universal 
 Milling Machines are run at only 90 turns per minute, 
 while others are run at 150 turns per minute. 
 
 As the life and efficiency of machines depend' largely 
 upon the amount of care bestowed upon them, it is 
 important that they should be kept clean and well oiled, 
 and that all repairs should be promptly made. 
 
 A coal or mineral oil called No. 2 cosmoline, we have oning. 
 found to be excellent for lubricating. In oiling the Uni- 
 versal Milling Machines the screw in the table should be 
 replaced to keep the dirt out of the clutch gear bearings 
 and the feed screw. These are oiled through the table 
 oil hole where the lines on the table and bed match. 
 Several oil holes are marked and have threaded stops. 
 
n6 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 117 
 
 The back gear of the No. 4, No. 3 prior to 1893, 
 Universal Milling Machine is oiled through the screw 
 hole W, Fig. 17, and enough oil is held in the quill to 
 last for several months. There are two other oil holes in 
 the cone of this machine. 
 
 The greatest care should be taken that chips do not 
 get into the holes in the spindles or between the arbor 
 collars. Chips should also be kept from between the 
 knee and frame. 
 
 In placing the tools belonging to the Universal Milling 
 Machines in the closets, the following method is con- 
 venient: Put the wrenches, centre keys, collet and 
 spanner upon the top shelf; the chuck, centre rest and 
 raising block upon the second shelf from the top; the 
 change gears and index plates in the wooden compart- 
 ment, and the vise and its clamps upon the bottom shelf. 
 When the hand wheel is not in use it should hang on the 
 stud at the side of the machine, and when the machine 
 is not in use it is well to bave the spiral head and foot- 
 stock on the table. 
 
 For catching oil from the work it is convenient to have on Pans, 
 two pans, one about 5^ inches square, and the other 
 5^ inches wide and 8 inches long. The pans can be 
 about i% inches deep and should have a strainer near 
 the top. Cleats on the bottom of the pans will keep them 
 from slipping off the table. These pans are not sent with 
 the machines, but may be ordered from us if desired. 
 
 The construction of the- machine should be examined Adjusting 
 
 en i /- Spindle. 
 
 carefully before any part is removed or adjusted. The 
 proper adjustment will allow the spindle to be easily 
 revolved by hand. The adjustment of the spindles will 
 not need to be changed for a long time after the machines 
 have left our works. 
 
 The question is often asked, How much skill is re- 
 quired to properly use or operate milling machines? A 
 conservative answer is given in the following editorial 
 from the American Machinist : 
 
u8 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 HILLING MACHINES AND SKILL. 
 
 " No one who has had sufficient experience with the 
 milling machine in its various forms to acquire a reason- 
 ably clear idea of its capabilities, and who has an oppor- 
 tunity to see the machine in use in the various shops, can 
 fail to see that in many of them it is very imperfectly 
 understood, and that, as a consequence, comparatively 
 poor results are obtained from its use results, we mean, 
 which are very poor compared with those which should be 
 obtained, and are obtained in every case where the legiti- 
 mate functions of the machine are clearly recognized, 
 and the conditions necessary to its successful operation 
 secured. 
 
 The milling machine intelligently selected or con- 
 structed, with reference to the work it is expected to do, 
 provided with well-designed and well-made special fix- 
 tures, where the nature of the work calls for them, and 
 then skillfully handled, is a surprisingly efficient tool, but 
 used as it is being used in many shops to-day, it is a 
 delusion, a failure, and an injury alike to the users, to 
 the builders, and to the good name of milling machines 
 generally.. 
 
 While it is true that there is scarcely a machine tool 
 in use which will yield more satisfactory returns for a 
 given outlay, when pains are taken to use it in the best 
 possible manner, it is also true, we think, that there is 
 no tool in common use, the efficiency of which is so 
 much reduced by careless or ignorant handling and 
 abuse. Considerable intelligence and skill, as well as 
 constant attention, must be bestowed upon the milling 
 machines in order to secure anything like a satisfactory 
 performance from them, either in the quality of the work 
 done or in its quantity. 
 
 In some cases this skill and intelligence must be pos- 
 sessed and exercised by the man who actually handles 
 the machine, in other, cases by some one who, though he 
 
120 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
BROWN A SHARPE MFG. CO. 121 
 
 does not actually operate it, supervises its operation, 
 and is responsible for the work done by it. But in any 
 case, the skill, the intelligence and the careful attention 
 must be exercised, or the results will be anything but 
 satisfactory. 
 
 We hear a great deal about the comparatively cheap 
 labor required to do milling machine work, and it is evi- 
 dent that too many shop proprietors have concluded 
 from this that about all that is necessary to do such 
 work is to buy the machine, hire a boy to run it, have 
 him " shown how" for an hour or so by one of the lathe 
 hands, and then let the boy and the machine work out 
 their own salvation. 
 
 No greater mistake could possibly be made, and it is 
 in such a shop that a milling machine man finds the 
 machine working often at less than half its capacity, 
 with an apology for a cutter, ground by hand in every 
 shape but the right one, two or three only of its super- 
 abundant teeth touching the work, and they, with a dis- 
 tinct thump and knock, indicating anything but a real 
 cutting action, while the boy stands by and occasionally 
 when it occurs to him to do so squirting a few drops of 
 black lubricating oil onto the chips with which the spaces 
 between the teeth are tightly jammed. The proprietors 
 of such shops are not usually very enthusiastic regarding 
 the use of milling machines, and it would be a wonder 
 if they were. 
 
 Where a universal milling machine is used upon tool 
 work, or for other purposes requiring a constant change 
 from one job to another, it is a mistake to suppose that 
 there is economy in the employment of a boy or cheap 
 man to operate it. And many of those who think they 
 are saving money in that way would be greatly surprised 
 to see the work turned out from such machines by good 
 mechanics who thoroughly understand them, and are 
 capable of earning good wages upon them. 
 
 Experience has proved that it pays as well to put first- 
 class mechanics upon such machines as upon any other 
 machine tools. 
 
122 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 Where milling machines are used for regular manufac- 
 turing operations, and the same cycle of movements is to 
 be repeated for a large number of pieces, boys, or men 
 who are not skilled mechanics, answer . every purpose ; 
 but the skilled supervision must be there, and it must be 
 seen to that the machine is as well taken care of, the 
 cutters as well made and ground, and in fact, everything 
 as well done as though a good mechanic actually operated 
 the machines. In fact, in the shops in which the best 
 results are obtained from the use of milling machines in 
 regular manufacturing operations all changes of the 
 machines from one job to another, all adjustments, and 
 the grinding and replacing of cutters are done by, or, at 
 least, under the direct supervision of a skilled mechanic, 
 responsible for the work of the machines, and who thor- 
 oughly understands and appreciates them. In this way 
 only can the full benefits of the machine be realized. 
 
 It is far too common to go into the tool-room and find 
 a splendid universal milling machine standing idle, while 
 perhaps two or three men are doing at the shaper, planer 
 or vise, jobs which could be done by an expert milling 
 machine hand, in one-fourth down to one-tenth of the 
 time, and a great deal better. One fault, which is far 
 more common than would readily be believed in some 
 quarters, is a failure to recognize the fact that a milling 
 machine necessarily calls for some sort of machine for 
 grinding cutters, and that a machine upon which cutters 
 are used, that are ground by holding the edges one after 
 the other against an emery wheel by hand, is at a 
 decided disadvantage, and will do no work which either 
 in quality or cost will make a favorable showing when 
 compared with that which is done by properly ground 
 cutters. 
 
 It should be much more generally recognized that in 
 milling machine practice, as in other things, there is a 
 right way and a wrong way, and that skilled, intelligent 
 labor pays best. When these facts are more generally 
 recognized, it will be better for both the builders and for 
 the users of the machines." 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO 
 
 FORMED CUTTERS. 
 
124 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 CUTTERS USED ON MILLING M&CHINES. 
 
 The most simple of the form cutters is the fly cutter 
 shown with its holder in Fig. 20, the cutting face as 
 shown by the end view being held about in line with the 
 centre of the holder. As these cutters have but one 
 cutting edge they mill accurately to their own shape, but 
 of course do not mill so fast, or wear as long as cutters 
 with a number of teeth. They can be formed very 
 exactly to any desired shape at comparatively small 
 expense, and thus may be used for many operations that 
 otherwise will not bear the cost of special cutters ; 
 for example : when one or two small gears are wanted 
 in experimental work. Fly cutters are also of special 
 advantage in making and duplicating screw machine and 
 other tools of irregular cutting contour. The clearance 
 in tools thus made may be obtained by holding the tool 
 blank in the vise so that the front end will be elevated 
 several degrees. 
 Formed As used by us the term " Formed Cutters " applies to 
 
 Mills or J 
 
 Formed the cutters with teeth so relieved that they can be sharp- 
 Cutters * 
 
 ened by grinding without changing their form, while 
 " Form Cutter " can be applied to any cutter cutting a 
 form, regardless of the manner in which the teeth may 
 be relieved. Fig. 25 represents a formed cutter, Fig. 26 
 a form cutter. 
 
 Single formed mills, as shown in Fig. 2 1 , are not uncom- 
 monly made in one piece 7 inches diameter or 6 inches 
 long. When the width of the cut is greater than can be 
 easily made by one cutter several cutters are .combined in 
 a gang as in Fig. 25. A gang is limited in length only 
 by the capacity and power of the milling machine. 
 
 Many users of Milling Machines are not fully aware 
 of the variety of Cutters that are made and carried in 
 stock. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 OF THK 
 
 UNIVElisiTY 
 
 -5 
 
 FIG. 21. 
 
126 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 Milling Cutter. 
 
 Left Hand End Mill. 
 
 End Mill with Centre Cut. 
 
 Screw Slotting Cutter. 
 
 Metal Slitting Saw. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 127 
 
 Side Milling Cutter with Inserted Teeth. 
 
 Involute Gear Cutter. 
 
 ^ TllP* 
 
 HF 
 
 Angular Cutter. 
 
 Epicycloidal Gear Cutter. 
 
 Stocking Cutter. 
 
128 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 SIDE MILLING CUTTER. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 129 
 
 We now manufacture twenty-six varieties and ten hun- 
 dred and thirty-eight sizes of stock cutters, and we can 
 make any size or shape, or arrange for any combination 
 of cutters that may be desired. The formed cutters can 
 be sharpened by grinding without changing their outline. 
 
 On this page we give outline cuts showing the forms 
 cut by the respective cutters, and on other pages we give 
 full page cuts of stock and special cutters. 
 
 Tap and Reamer Cutters. 
 
 Four Lipped Twist 
 Drill Cutter. 
 
 Tap Cutter. 
 
 Reamer Cutter. 
 
 It is well to have mills or cutters as small in diameter 
 as the work or their strength will admit. The reason is 
 shown by Fig. 22. Suppose the piece I D C J E is to 
 be cut from I J to D E. If the large mill A is used, it 
 will strike the piece first at I when its centre is at K, and 
 will finish its cut when the centre is at M. The line G 
 shows how far the mill must travel to cut off the stock 
 
 Diameter 
 of Mills. 
 
130 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 GEAR CUTTERS. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 131 
 
 I J D E. If the small mill B is used, however, it travels 
 only the length of the line H. It can also be seen that 
 a tooth of B travels through a shorter distance between 
 the lines D E and I J than a tooth of A. This is true of 
 all ordinary work, or where the depth of cut I D is not 
 more than half the diameter of the small mill. 
 
 The advantage of small mills has been illustrated in 
 our own works, where a difference of }4 an inch in the 
 mills has made a difference of ic% in the cost of the 
 work. 
 
 In short, small mills do more and better work, cut 
 more easily, keep sharp longer and cost less than large 
 mills. 
 
 When it is possible the mill should be wider than the Length of 
 work, and the hole in a mill should be as small as the Diameter 
 strength of the arbor will admit. The stock around the Mnis. m 
 hole, however, should not be less than ^ of an inch thick. 
 
 A mill is not necessarily too soft because it can be Temper of 
 scratched with a file, for sometimes when cutters are too 
 hard or brittle and trouble is caused by pieces breaking 
 out of the teeth they can be made to stand well and do 
 good work by starting the temper. 
 
 Of late years mills have been made with coarser teeth Number of 
 than formerly, the advantages being more room for the Mills? 
 chips and less friction between the teeth and the work. 
 When the teeth are so fine that the mill drags, or 
 the stock is powdered the mill heats quickly and does 
 not cut freely. 
 
 The friction may also be reduced, especially in large 
 mills taking heavy cuts, by nicking or cutting away parts 
 of the teeth, which breaks the chips and allows heavier 
 cuts and feeds to be taken. 
 
 Knowing the conditions under which a mill is to be 
 used in our own practice, we modify the number of teeth 
 as seems expedient, usually making the special mills 
 coarser in pitch than the stock mills, for our observation 
 indicates there are more mills with too many teeth than 
 with too few. But sometimes we relatively increase the 
 
BROWN & SHARPL MFG. CO. 
 
 FIG. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 133 
 
 number of teeth, as for instance, large mills, in some cases, 
 'can advantageously be designed to have more than one 
 tooth cutting all the time on broad surfaces and in deep 
 cuts. 
 
 In England cutters generally have finer teeth than in 
 America, the pitch being about two-thirds as much as 
 ours, as shown by the rules given at a meeting of the 
 Institution of Mechanical Engineers in London, October 
 30, i&go. These rules we are permitted to print by the 
 courtesy of the gentlemen who presented them at the 
 meeting. 
 
 Mr. Geo. Addy, of Sheffield, estimates the pitch of 
 teeth of cutters from 4 inches to 1 5 inches diameter by the 
 following rule : 
 
 Pitch ininches=-\/ (diameter in inches X 8) X 0.0625. 
 Mr. J. Macfarlane Gray pointed out that this rule might 
 be put into a somewhat simpler form for more convenient 
 use as a plain workshop rule, by saying that the product 
 of the pitch in inches multiplied by the pitch in thirty- 
 seconds of an inch was 'equal to the diameter in inches, and 
 that a still more simple way of stating what was substan- 
 tially the same rule was to say that the number of teeth in 
 a milling cutter ought to be one hundred times the pitch 
 in inches ; that is, if there were 27 teeth, the pitch ought 
 to be 0.27 inch. 
 
 In regard to the cutting angle of the teeth we in Cutting 
 theory agree with what Mr. Addy stated in the paper A Tteth f 
 before referred to, viz. : " The adoption of the most suit- 
 able cutting angle should receive the same close attention 
 that is now universally bestowed upon the ordinary tools 
 for turning and planing." But in practice while in many 
 instances adopting the angle according to the material to 
 be used, yet taking into consideration all the conditions of 
 using and caring for the cutters, we have generally found 
 it satisfactory to have the cutting edges of the teeth radial. 
 As a result of considerable research and experience Mr. 
 Addy gives as his opinion that the front of the teeth 
 instead of being truly radial should have a backward 
 
134 BROWN A SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 inclination of 10 degrees from the radius, the cutting angle 
 in this way being 70 degrees and the clearance angle 10 
 degrees. 
 cl /?J?i? ce The relief or clearance of mills we think should usually 
 
 of Mills. * 
 
 be about three degrees, and the land at the top of the 
 teeth from .02 inches to .04 inches wide before the clear- 
 ance is cut or ground. 
 
 On cotter mills, page 135, the clearance should be at the 
 outside of the two teeth, as the cutting is not done directly 
 upon the end ; but this clearance should usually be only 
 about one-quarter of that on other mills. 
 
 Mills to cut grooves should be hollowing about five one- 
 hundreths in one inch for clearance, that is, a grooving 
 mill should be about one one-hundreth of an inch thinner at 
 one inch from its edge or circumference than it is at the 
 edge. Our grooving mills are given a limit of two one- 
 thousandths in thickness. Mills made to exact thickness 
 are very expensive. In cutting grooves that are to have 
 some parts of their sides nearly or quite parallel, it is well 
 to leave considerable stock, for the finishing cut, as mills 
 like taps do better work when they can get well into the 
 stock. 
 
 For the same reason if the sides have to be left slant- 
 ing before the finishing cut is taken, no part of either side 
 should slant less than three degrees, or about one -$ of 
 an inch in each inch. 
 
 Clearance in a fly cutter is obtained by moving the 
 cutter towards a, Fig. 20. 
 
 sketches A sketch of a mill with a solid shank, or of a formed 
 of Mills. cutter t h a t has half of its outline unlike the other half, 
 should clearly show which way the mill is to turn. This 
 can be done by an arrow, as shown on page 135, or by 
 writing the word " coming " either at the top or bottom of 
 the sketch, as the case may be. This cut also shows how 
 the terms right and left are applied to angular cutters and 
 mills. It is well to show the work in red lines in the 
 position that it will occupy when cut by the mill. 
 
BROWN & SHAKPE MFG. CO. 
 
 135 
 
 COTTER MILL. 
 
 L. H. THREAD. 
 
 R. II. THREAD. 
 
 COMING 
 
 LEFT HAND EIGHT HAND 
 
 GOING 
 
 EIGHT HAND LEFT HAND 
 
 ANGULAR CUTTERS. 
 
 COMING SAME AS TOR B. & S. 
 
 LEFT HAND MILLING MCH. 
 
 G OING SAME DIRECTION AS A 
 
 RIGHT HAND TWIST DRILL. 
 
 END MILLS. 
 
I3 6 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 Templets. j n ordering formed cutters it is well to send templets of 
 the desired shapes, and to state how nearly exact the cut- 
 ters must be. If any part of the outline is to be a straight 
 line the sketch should clearly show this, and if any part is 
 to be circular the radius should be given. Unless instruc- 
 tions have been given to the contrary, mills are generally 
 made and hardened to cut steel or iron. 
 
 Sharpening A dull mill wears away rapidly and does poor work. 
 Accordingly care must be taken to keep mills sharp. In 
 sharpening them it is necessary to be very careful that the 
 temper should not be drawn. 
 
 Grade ot The emery wheel should be of the proper grade as to 
 wheel hardness and as to the size of the emery. The wheel 
 
 required for 
 
 the work, should be soft enough so that it can be easily scratched 
 with a pocket knife blade, and the emery should not be 
 finer than 90 nor coarser than 60. As a rule, the coarser 
 and softer the wheel, the faster it should run, although the 
 periphery speed should not exceed 5000 feet per minute, 
 width of A wheel of the proper grade should be used with the 
 wheel, face not to exceed ^ " wide. If the wheel glazes, the 
 temper of the cutter will be drawn. In such a case, if the 
 wheel is not altogether too hard, it can sometimes be rem- 
 edied by reducing the face of the wheel to about yk" or 
 by reducing the speed, or by both. 
 
 Before using, a wheel should be turned off so that it will 
 run true. A wheel that glazes immediately after it has 
 been turned off can sometimes be corrected by loosen- 
 ing the nut and allowing the wheel to assume a slightly 
 different position when it is again tightened. 
 
 Another method of preventing a wheel's glazing is to 
 use a piece of emery wheel, a few grades harder than the 
 wheel in use, on the face of the wheel, whereby the cut- 
 ting surface of the wheel is made more open and less apt 
 to glaze. 
 
 Take light cuts and move the cutter rapidly across the 
 face of the wheel. In one of our circulars is published a 
 list of wheels and speeds suitable for tool grinding 
 machines. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 137 
 
 Mills that have their teeth ground for clearance are 
 particularly apt to have their temper drawn in sharpening, 
 especially at the edge of the teeth, and often when the 
 temper has been drawn and the teeth are polished, they 
 will look as usual after being ground. 
 
 In sharpening angular cutters on the face, it is best to sharpening 
 leave the side of the teeth crowning or a little higher Cutfers. r 
 toward the centre or hole of the cutter than towards the 
 point of the teeth. 
 
 Formed cutters are sharpened by central or radial sharpening 
 
 J Formed 
 
 grinding upon the front of the teeth, square across the cut- Cutters, 
 ter or in line with the axis, for if the teeth are not ground 
 radially, the work done by them will *not be of the correct 
 shape. The tendency, however, in grinding these mills is 
 to take away too much from the outer part of the front of 
 the teeth. An attachment for grinding formed cutters is 
 made for our No. 3 Universal Cutter and Reamer Grinder. 
 
 The best plan is to have all mills sharpened immediately 
 after they have been used, before they are put away. 
 
 The advantage of properly sharpening cutters is indi- 
 cated by the amount of work done by the gear cutter 
 shown on page 138. This cutter was, when new, the same 
 in appearance as the gear cutters shown on page 127, and 
 it has cut 467, 4 pitch, 64 teeth, 3-inch face cast iron 
 gears, making a total length of cut of 7472 feet. The 
 teeth of the gears were cut from solid blanks and finished 
 in one cut. This record while good is not exceptional. 
 
^ 
 
 O] 
 
 TJNIVI ,: 
 
 238- 
 
 ^^ CALM 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 GEAR CUTTER WORN. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 Tsf- '-'B.'MaX 
 
 OK T^- \ 
 
 t uNivtt^ir? )) 
 
 - J 
 
 -uv^r 
 
140 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 USE OF MILLING MACHINES, 
 
 EXAMPLES OF OPERATIONS. 
 
 U inth 0il Oil is used in milling to obtain smoother work, to make 
 C work r tne m ^ s * ast l n g er an d, where the nature of the work 
 requires, to wash the chips from the work or from the 
 teeth of the cutters. It is generally used in milling a 
 large number of pieces of steel, wrought iron, malleable 
 iron or tough bronze. When only a few pieces are to be 
 milled it frequently is not used, and some steel castings are 
 milled without oil ; also in cutting cast iron it is not used. 
 For light, flat cuts it is put on the cutter with a brush, giv- 
 ing the work a thin covering like a varnish ; for heavy 
 cuts it should be led to the mill from the drip can, sent 
 with each machine, or it should be pumped upon or across 
 the mill in cutting deep grooves, in milling several grooves 
 at one time, or indeed, in milling any work where, if the 
 chips should stick, they might catch between the teeth and 
 sides of the groove and scratch or bend the work. 
 
 Generally we use lard oil in milling, but any animal or 
 fish oils may be used. The oil may be separated from 
 the chips by a centrifugal separator, or by the wet process, 
 so that a large amount may be used with but little waste. 
 
 Some manufacturers prefer to mix mineral oil with lard 
 or fish oil, and state the mixture is less expensive and 
 works well. Prof. J. E. Denton has made experiments 
 with mixtures and thinks that mineral or coal oil can be 
 advantageously used. 
 
 An excellent lubricant to use with a pump is by mixing 
 together and boiling for one-half hour, ^ pound Sal Soda, 
 Y-2. pint Lard Oil, >^ pint Soft Soap and water enough to 
 make 10 quarts. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 141 
 
 There is a difference of opinion as to whether the work 
 should be moved against the cutter as at A, Fig. 23, or 
 with it as at B. But in most cases our experience and 
 experiments show it is best for the work to move against 
 the mill as shown at A, Fig. 23. 
 
 When it moves in this way the teeth of the cutter, in ^w^ich 
 commencing their work, as soon as the hard surface or ^^ jf n 
 scale is once broken, are immediately brought in contact der a Mill 
 with the softer metal, and when the scale is reached it is 
 pried or broken off. Also when a piece moves in this way, 
 the cutter cannot dig into the work as it is liable to do 
 when the bed is moved in the direction indicated at 
 B. When a piece is on the side of a cutter that is mov- 
 ing downwards, the piece should, as a rule, have a rigid 
 support and be fed by raising the knee of the machine. 
 
 Some work, however, is better milled by moving with 
 the cutter. For example : To dress both sides of a thick 
 piece D with a pair of large straddle mills, it might be well 
 to move the piece towards the left, as the mills then tend 
 to keep it down in place instead of lifting it. 
 
 Again in milling deep slots, or in cutting off stock, with 
 a thin cutter or saw, it may be better to move the work 
 with the cutter, as the cutter is then less likely to crowd 
 side-wise and make a crooked slot. 
 
 When the work is moving with the cutter, the table gib 
 screws must be set up rather hard, for if the work moves 
 too easily the cutter may catch and the cutter or work be 
 injured. A counter weight to holdback the table is excel- 
 lent in such milling. 
 
 For the purpose of making a comparative test of the two Experi- 
 ments to 
 methods, we made the following four experiments on our test method 
 
 No. 5 Plain Milling Machine : cSfter? S 
 
 This machine had been provided with a take-up attach- 
 ment for back-lash of table, two cutters of same diameter 
 and width were used, and suitable castings were provided, 
 same being 3" square and 3 ft. long (pickled). 
 
 First experiment with No. i Cutter was with the cut, 
 cutting down on scale and feeding 6" per minute. After 
 
142 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 cutting one surface 3 feet long, the cutter was found to be 
 dull. 
 
 Second experiment with No, 2 Cutter was against the 
 cut, cutting under the scale and feeding 6" per minute. 
 Eight castings 3 feet long were milled before the cutter 
 had shown the wear of No. i. 
 
 In order to prove the tempering of the Cutters both 
 were re-ground. 
 
 Third experiment was with No. i Cutter working in same 
 manner that No. 2 Cutter had been, viz. : against the cut, 
 under the scale and feeding 6" per minute. Eleven cast- 
 ings 3 feet long were milled before the Cutter had shown 
 the wear of No. 2 . 
 
 Fourth experiment was with No. 2 Cutter working in the 
 same manner as No. i, as described in first experiment. 
 This Cutter failed on the first cut. 
 
 Speed of It is impossible to give definite rules for the speed and 
 feed of Cutters, and what is here said is only in the way 
 of suggestions. Sometimes the speed must be reduced, 
 and yet the feed need not be changed. The judgment of 
 the foreman or man in charge of the machine should 
 determine what is best in each instance. 
 Average The average speed on wrought iron and annealed steel 
 
 Speed. . ..... 
 
 is perhaps forty feet a minute, which gives about sixty 
 turns a minute for Cutters 2 y 2 inches diameter. The feed 
 of the work for this surface speed of the Cutter can be 
 about i y% inches a minute, and the depth of cut say T ^ of 
 an inch. In cast iron a Cutter can have a surface speed 
 of about fifty feet a minute while the feed is i ^ inches a 
 minute and the cut T 3 ^- of an inch deep, and in tough brass 
 the speed may be eighty feet, the feed as before and the 
 chip % of an inch. 
 
 As a small Cutter cuts faster than a large one, an end 
 mill for example, ^ inch diameter can be run about 400 
 revolutions with a feed of 4 inches a minute. 
 
 For examples of what may regularly be done under 
 suitable conditions, we may mention that Cutters 2^ 
 inches in diameter used in cutting annealed cast iron in 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 143 
 
 our works are run at more than 200 turns, or at a surface 
 speed of more than 125 feet, while the work is fed more 
 than eight inches a minute. The cuts are light, not more 
 than -j 1 ^ of an inch deep, and the work is short, from % 
 inch to i inch long. Two side mills 5 inches in diameter 
 running 50 turns a minute, dress both edges of cast iron 
 bars Y^ of an inch thick, with a feed of more than 4 
 inches a minute. 
 
 An English authority, Mr, Geo. Addy, gives as safe 
 speeds for cutters of 6 inches diameter and upwards : 
 
 Steel, 36 ft. per minute with a feed of " per minute. 
 Wrought Iron, 48 " " i" 
 
 Cast Iron, 60 " " " " if" 
 
 Brass, 120 " " " " 2f" " 
 
 And he gives as a simple rule for obtaining the speed : 
 Number of revolutions which the cutter spindle should 
 make when working on cast iron =240 divided by the 
 diameter of the cutter in inches. 
 
 Mr. John H. Briggs, another English authority, states, 
 " for cutting wrought iron with a milling cutter taking a 
 cut of one inch depth which was a different thing from 
 mere surface cutting a circumferential speed of from 36 
 to 40 feet per minute was the highest that could be attained 
 with due consideration to economy, and to the time occu- 
 pied in grinding and changing cutters ; the feed would be 
 at the rate of S/s inch per minute. Upon soft mild steel, 
 about 30 feet per minute was the highest speed, with % 
 inch depth of cut and fy inch feed per minute. Upon 
 tough gun-metal, 80 feet per minute, with ^ inch depth 
 of cut and ^ inch feed. For cutting cast iron geared 
 wheels from blanks previously turned, and using in this 
 case comparatively small milling cutters of only 3^ inches 
 diameter, the speed was 26^ feet per minute, with % 
 inch depth of cut and ^ i ncn fee ^ P er minute." 
 
 Slotting cutters may often be run at a higher speed 
 than other cutters of the same diameter, but with a wider 
 face. Angular cutters must in some instances be used 
 
144 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 with a fine feed to prevent breaking the points of the 
 teeth. 
 
 The following table may be of service as suggesting 
 speeds that may be tried with our machines on ordinary 
 work, but it is not published as an absolute guide, and as 
 before stated, the judgment of the foreman must deter- 
 mine what is best in each instance. In considering the 
 table it must be borne in mind that rapid progress is being 
 made in milling, and that all figures are submitted with the 
 certainty that improvements in machines, cutters and fix- 
 tures will soon render them obsolete. 
 
 Limits in An ordinary limit is four one-thousandths of an inch. 
 This is allowable for bolt heads, nuts, and the squares 
 at the ends of shafts where cranks or hand wheels are 
 used, also for some kinds of gibs and many parts that are 
 milled for a finish. 
 
 In most sewing machine pieces, electrical and scientific 
 instruments, type writers and fine machinery, the limit is 
 two one thousandths. Thus a slot that is called half an 
 inch wide may be any size between half an inch and five 
 hundred and two one thousandths of an inch (.500" to 
 .502") while the tongue or piece that goes into the half 
 inch slot may be of any size between two one-thousandths 
 less than one half inch and one-half inch (498" to 500"). 
 On many pieces, for instance usually on those milled for a 
 finish, the limit may of course be either above or below 
 the standard size. 
 
 Some work should be milled as close as possible to exact 
 size ; and when close fits are required it is often cheaper 
 and better to do the fitting by the milling machine than by 
 filing or other hand work. 
 
 The most accurate results in milling to a given thickness 
 or size are ordinarily obtained by straddle mills or side 
 milling cutters ; for when only one side is milled at a time 
 and the piece has to be changed from side to side, it is 
 hardly practicable to work to a smaller limit than two one- 
 thousandths of an inch. Side milling frequently requires 
 more attention to keep the work smooth than ordinary sur- 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 
 Ed 
 H 
 
 ^4-l 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 SI- 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 ; 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 - 
 
 2 
 
 '- 
 
 3 
 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 'S - 
 
 ^, 
 
 
 
 01 
 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 
 -. 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 S3 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 CO 
 
 03 
 
 
 11 
 
 H 
 
 CO 
 
 
 ** 
 
 - 
 
 
 CO 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 a 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 co 
 
 
 5 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 
 <- 
 
 -< 
 
 33 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 a 
 
 ,3 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 Oi 
 
 
 
 eo 
 
 - 
 
 
 s 
 
 ~ 
 
 e 
 
 ^ 
 
 * 
 
 - 
 
 t ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 '- 
 
 ~ 
 
 t>* 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 "8 
 
 1 
 
 CO 
 
 Cutter pr. 
 Minute. 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 a 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 MILLINC 
 
 t 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 Jo 
 
 ' 
 
 ^ 
 
 8 
 
 58 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 D 
 
 V 
 
 " 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <= 
 
 
 . 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 tt 
 
 w 
 
 e 
 
 
 '- 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 34 i 
 
 s 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 ci 
 
 5 
 
 o 1 
 
 fc 
 
 t- 
 
 lev. 
 
 < 
 
 r- 
 
 n 
 
 T 
 
 k 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 T- 
 
 f 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 <*- c 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 f 
 
 oo 
 
 f 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 ej 
 
 
 ?) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 SJJ 
 
 00 
 
 
 O 
 
 - 
 
 * 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 eo 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 1-1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 *"* 
 
 
 
 FEED PEF 
 
 ^00 
 
 1 
 
 CO 
 
 - 
 
 oo 
 
 CO 
 
 oo 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 so 
 
 M 
 
 eo 
 
 3 
 
 co 
 
 to 
 
 2 
 
 eo 
 
 M 
 
 CO 
 
 00 
 
 O 
 
 ct 
 
 
 1 
 
 M -^ 
 
 3 
 
 = 
 
 N 
 
 00 
 
 X) 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 . 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 03 
 
 ^3 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 p i 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 CO 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1-1 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1-1 
 
 
 
 U 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 ** 3 
 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 s 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 fc 
 
 '.r 
 
 fc 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 CJ 
 
 N 
 
 -J 
 
 M 
 
 lO 
 
 
 
 s, 
 
 CO 
 
 g i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 4> 3 
 
 . . 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 s 
 
 O 
 
 3 
 
 Ca 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 $ 
 
 * 
 
 s 
 
 (0 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 CO 
 
 O 
 
 M 
 
 IS 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 
 i 
 
 5 
 
 w Ej 
 g 
 
 - 
 
 |CM 
 
 h 
 
 H> 
 
 cc 
 
 ^ 
 
 K 
 
 mm 
 
 
 
 
 ( 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 T- 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 u; 
 
 > 
 
146 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 
 a 
 a 
 
 i MINUTE. 
 
 |S 
 
 PH 
 
 ^; 
 
 "9 
 <o 
 
 g 
 
 oo 
 
 30 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 - 
 
 00 
 
 
 M 
 
 0) 
 
 - 
 
 00 
 
 2 
 
 <o 
 
 c>r 
 
 " 
 
 r. 
 
 O 
 
 S 
 
 CO 
 
 ft' 
 
 - 
 
 s 
 
 
 H 
 
 FEKDPKI 
 
 0> 
 g^2 
 
 2 
 
 X 
 
 CO 
 
 r. 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 02 
 
 GO 
 OO 
 
 'w 
 
 ;? 
 
 9 
 o 
 
 oo 
 
 -i 
 
 =9 
 
 
 
 j 
 
 CO 
 
 2 
 
 - 
 
 5 
 
 " 
 
 5 
 
 op 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 5 ^ 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 eo 
 
 
 
 sd 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 a 
 
 
 g c 
 
 1-1 
 
 1-1 
 
 
 
 -i 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 ~ 
 
 s 
 
 ^ 
 
 X 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 fa 
 
 
 5 ^- 
 
 1 
 
 ffl 
 
 to 
 
 00 
 
 !C 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 .- 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 
 | 
 
 g 
 
 
 S*o 
 
 ^^ 
 
 SO 
 
 1 
 
 :: 
 
 *"* 
 
 " 
 
 
 
 OJ 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 
 "o a_o; 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 ^ 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 c, 
 
 -r. 
 
 -1 
 
 ^ 
 
 r 
 
 *, 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 DC 
 
 w 
 
 1C 
 
 M 
 
 M 
 
 w 
 
 eo 
 
 
 CO 
 
 70 
 
 ce 
 
 fit 
 
 w 
 
 =0 
 
 CO 
 
 8 
 
 i 
 
 z 
 
 fa 
 
 o 
 
 
 oJ 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 =5 
 
 
 . 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 SURF AC 
 
 C 
 
 o 
 
 -r 
 
 s 
 
 = 
 I 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 s 
 
 8 
 
 5? 
 
 ri 
 
 s 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 r-' 
 
 IS 
 
 j 
 
 CL 
 
 
 
 s. - 
 
 .2 o = 
 
 -1 
 
 CM 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 (0 
 
 T 
 
 I'* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 ) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 ^ 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 
 a 
 
 l 
 
 r 
 
 f 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 -A 
 
 
 t 
 
 
 op 
 
 
 ao 
 
 op 
 
 op 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 -t- 
 
 
 
 u. 
 
 
 2 
 
 ^I 
 
 K 
 
 00 
 
 g 
 
 C 
 
 ^ 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 " 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 so 
 
 OO 
 
 - 
 
 so 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 (N. 
 
 O 
 (r\ 
 
 
 a 
 
 J3 c 
 
 oo 
 cc 
 
 5 
 
 ? 
 
 
 
 op 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 X) 
 
 X 
 
 
 00 
 
 
 Q 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 ^ 2 
 
 
 00 
 
 s 
 
 
 " 
 
 - 
 
 IN 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 t>< 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 UJ 
 
 li. 
 
 Q 
 Z 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 |l 
 
 | 
 
 c* 
 
 9 
 
 S 
 
 oo 
 
 CO 
 
 . 
 
 
 H 
 CO 
 
 H 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 CO 
 
 N 
 
 - 
 
 * 
 
 
 - 
 
 '_ 
 
 Vj 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 2 
 
 a 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 *" 
 
 1 
 
 CCJ 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 -r 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C/) 
 
 Q 
 
 kj 
 
 S 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 M 
 
 "* 
 
 
 "^ 
 
 00 
 
 " 
 
 
 HH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 CL 
 CO 
 
 fa 
 
 OS 
 
 o 
 
 
 Speed of 
 Cutter pr. 
 Minute. 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 RFACE B 
 
 O 
 
 S 
 
 i 
 
 O 
 
 * 
 
 o 
 
 -r 
 
 so 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 " 
 
 CO 
 C't 
 
 - 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 v-l 
 
 <= 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 o 
 
 * 
 
 
 02 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 -| 
 
 ct 
 
 M 
 
 
 91 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1C 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 '" 
 
 
 
 
 x 
 
 JO 
 
 re 
 
 80 
 
 M 
 
 :'r 
 
 70 
 
 8 
 
 " 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s s 
 
 H 
 
 " 
 
 H 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 T 
 
 
 
 U) 
 
 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 ) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 147 
 
 
 
 
 *** 
 
 
 
 
 
 ej 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 | 3 
 
 CO 
 
 g 
 
 9 
 
 
 09 
 
 
 c. 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 x 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 , . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 j 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 STEEL. 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 
 " 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 CO 
 
 H 
 
 eo 
 
 2 
 
 M 
 
 a 
 
 op 
 
 K 
 
 00 
 Is. 
 
 -+ 
 
 M 
 
 -f 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 - 
 
 3 
 
 cc 
 -1-1 
 
 2 
 
 WINERY 
 
 
 N 
 
 | 
 
 2 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 ! 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 ACHINEF 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 N 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 CT 
 
 00 
 
 00 
 
 eo 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 ^ 
 
 s 
 
 I 
 
 op 
 
 7-8 each. 
 
 
 
 i*s 
 
 5 
 
 * 
 
 s 
 
 N 
 
 eo 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 '^_ 
 
 -c 
 
 (M 
 
 c 
 
 (N 
 
 c 
 
 oo 
 
 - 
 
 B 
 
 e 
 
 c 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 so 
 
 ftS 
 
 o 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 U. 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 " 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 " 
 
 
 5s 
 
 
 'S aaJ 
 
 "C l. 3 
 
 $sl 
 
 
 
 ; 
 
 i 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 MILLING 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 i 
 
 - 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 ; 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 vEYSEAT 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 URFACE 
 
 ; 
 
 r f 
 
 S 
 
 ; 
 
 s 
 
 ; 
 
 ? 
 
 . 
 
 '-> 
 
 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 . 
 
 1! 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 5 s 
 
 H 
 
 CM 
 
 v 
 
 i 
 
 n| 
 
 V 
 
 ^ 
 
 mm 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 | 
 
 rc 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 C 
 
 CM 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 
 &ol 
 
 
 
 
 *! 
 
 
 * 
 
 oo 
 
 
 
 30 
 
 N 
 
 00 
 
 GO 
 
 op 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 ?, 
 
 N 
 
 op 
 
 t 
 
 v 
 
 
 
 x 
 
 f 
 
 
 x 
 
 SJ| 
 
 1 
 
 1-1 
 
 
 : 
 
 " 
 
 * 
 
 Z 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 - 
 
 00 
 
 : 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 -*< 
 
 N 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 -H 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 30 
 
 Of) 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 1- 
 
 CO 
 
 oc 
 
 CM 
 
 oo 
 
 GO 
 
 op 
 
 N 
 
 ^ 
 
 ffl 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 
 op 
 
 9 
 
 
 - 
 
 coy o 
 
 s-i 
 
 
 :t 
 
 L'J 
 
 _^ 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 .S 
 
 C "g 1 - 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - . 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 =? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 | S 5 
 
 TH 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 ri 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 eo 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 9) 
 
 3D 
 
 
 55 
 
 i 
 
 
 H 
 
 fH 
 
 2 
 
 SC 
 
 2 
 
 /. 
 
 wi 
 
 2 
 
 * 
 
 ILLING 1 
 
 * 
 
 2 
 
 (C 
 
 2 
 
 H 
 
 C 
 
 S 
 
 2 
 
 " 
 
 - 
 
 H 
 
 op 
 
 1 
 
 OS 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 55 
 
 S 
 
 2 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 "o aaJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 I|i 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 o 
 
 fa 
 
 PC 
 
 M 
 
 " 
 
 i 
 
 M 
 
 w 
 
 -f 
 
 ' 
 
 a 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 CO 
 [H 
 
 M 
 
 
 * 
 
 a 
 
 
 a3 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <*= 
 
 ^ 
 
 ", 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i . 
 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 N 
 
 T- 
 
 
 
 col 
 
 ^" 
 
 <* 
 
 m 
 
 U) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 
 
 -1 
 
 cr 
 
 CM 
 
 ) 
 
 
 T 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 I" 
 
148 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 face milling. But very accurate milling may be done and 
 excellent surfaces obtained by small end mills running at 
 high speeds, 
 pickling Castings that are to be milled should be free from sand. 
 
 Castings 
 
 and They should be well pickled, and in some cases it is an 
 
 Forgings. J 
 
 advantage to have them rattled after being pickled. 
 Where they are small and are to be finished rapidly it is 
 also well to have them annealed. 
 
 . Forgings should be free from scale. They can be 
 pickled in ten minutes in one part sulphuric acid and 
 twenty-five parts boiling water, and if then rinsed in boil- 
 ing water they will dry before becoming rusty, 
 washers When the collars sent with our milling arbors are not 
 
 and Collars 
 
 for Arbors, the right thickness to bring the cutters into the desired 
 position washers are employed. The following thicknesses 
 are convenient .001", .002", .004", .008", .016", and 
 .032" as these give all steps from .001" to .032". The 
 collars usually sent are cast iron, but for hard usage steel 
 collars are preferable. 
 
 Lead A lead hammer is frequently used to drive arbors or 
 ier * collets into the spindle or bottom or seat work in the 
 vise. 
 
 A bar of brass or copper, ^ inch diameter by 5 or 6 
 inches long, will also be found useful to place against end 
 mills, or the end of small collets after the mills are in place. 
 In this way the driving is often more conveniently done 
 and any hammer may be used, 
 selection The construction of the machine having been carefully 
 
 for Novice, examined, and the novice having made himself familiar 
 with the various classes of cutters, it is well if he is using 
 a Universal Machine, to choose some work at the outset 
 that does not require the use of the spiral head. Such 
 work is generally held in the vise when milled. 
 Setting The vise can be set with its jaws parallel to the spindle 
 
 Plain Base, by placing one of the milling arbors in the spindle and 
 then bringing the jaws up to the arbor. It can be set at 
 right angles with the spindle by a square placed against 
 the arbor and the jaws. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 149 
 
 The front of the table of the machine can also be used 
 in setting the vise. 
 
 The swivel vise, which is now sent with all of the Uni- 
 versal Milling Machines and Plain Milling Machines with 
 Screw Feed, can be set by making use of the graduations 
 on the base. 
 
 To illustrate the various ways in which the machines are Examples 
 
 J of Work 
 
 used, we have given descriptions and cuts of a number of Done on 
 
 Milling 
 
 operations. Many of these cuts are made on the No: i Machines. 
 Universal Milling Machine, but it is obvious that the other 
 machines may generally be adapted to similar work, and 
 the directions given in connection with the No. i Universal 
 Milling Machine can, in most instances, be applied when 
 doing work on the other machines. 
 
 Small stock may be conveniently and advantageously Cu g" off 
 cut into short lengths, especially when it is of a section not 
 easily handled in a cutting off machine. The cutter com- 
 monly used is the metal slitting saw, shown on page 126. 
 It is held on an arbor as in Fig. 23, and the work is fed as 
 indicated by the arrow on the piece A. The table may be 
 fed by hand or automatically, the stop being used to deter- 
 mine the length of feed, and the work may be placed 
 exactly in the required position by noting the readings on 
 the graduations around the end of the cross feed shaft. 
 When cut in a Milling Machine the pieces are square at 
 both ends and uniform in length. 
 
 If it is desirable only to square the ends of small pieces Squaring 
 
 J the Ends 
 
 and make them uniform in length, it may be done by first of small 
 
 & J / Pieces. 
 
 squaring one end of all the pieces, and then by bringing 
 the finished end against a piece clamped to the immovable 
 vise jaw to serve as a stop, while the other end is brought 
 against the mill by the cross feed and run past it automati- 
 cally or by hand, the vise jaws being parallel with the 
 spindle. In squaring up the ends, at first, a face or an 
 end mill, as shown on page 126, or possibly a side milling 
 cutter, Fig. 23, screwed on the end of an arbor may be 
 used. 
 
150 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 ^' l & 2 4 snows two s ide "rills or twm m iU s u P on an arbor. 
 o f re n MuIs They ordinarily revolve in the direction indicated by the 
 arrow, and are used in milling tongues or ribs. 
 
 As shown they are held apart by a collar or washer, but 
 a milling cutter may be put between them and used to 
 dress the top of the tongue and five surfaces then be 
 milled at once. 
 
 The two sides and bottom of bur Milling Machine 
 Vises, page 151, are milled on the No. 5 Plain Milling 
 Machine, with cutters arranged in this way. The length 
 of cut on the No. 2 Vise is 9^ inches, width on the top 
 5^ inches, and the height of the sides 2^ inches, mak- 
 ing the total width of cut 10 inches. The side mills 
 have 38 teeth and are 8 inches in diameter, the milling 
 cutter has 14 teeth and is 2^ inches in diameter. The 
 number of revolutions of the spindle is 24 per minute; 
 the feed is 4^4 inches per minute. The time required to 
 set and remove the work and make the cut is eight min- 
 utes. The figures are not given as showing remarkable 
 speed, but as indicating what may be easily attained in 
 ordinary work. 
 
 By a similar arrangement of cutters small rectangular 
 pieces can be milled with two cuts, the first across the top 
 and sides, the second across the bottom and ends. 
 
 Cast iron pieces 6 inches wide and about 8 inches long 
 are milled on the sides and bottom on the No. 24 Plain 
 Milling Machine, by cutters making 24 revolutions per 
 minute, with a feed of 2 inches per minute. The side 
 milling cutters are 5^6 inches diameter, and the milling 
 cutters 3 inches diameter. The total width of cut is 
 about 8 inches and the depth T 3 ^ inch. The top is milled 
 by an inserted tooth mill 6^ inches diameter, making 22 
 revolutions per minute, with a feed of 2^3 inches. 
 Another cut is made on the inside with an inserted tooth 
 mill 4 inches diameter, making 36 revolutions per minute, 
 with a feed of 2^ inches. 
 
 A guaranteed cut in tool steel on the No. 4 Plain 
 Machine, which was surpassed in daily practice was 8 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 FIG. 24. 
 
 MILLING MACHINE VISE. 
 
152 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 inches wide, j inch deep, with ^ inch feed per minute. 
 And one of the cuts most commonly seen on a No. 23 
 Plain in our shops is in cast iron 9 inches wide, ^ inch 
 deep, with 3 inch feed and 30 feet surface speed per minute. 
 
 When side cutting teeth are dull, straddle mills may be 
 interchanged, thus bringing sharp teeth into use, and if it 
 is necessary that the distance D, Fig. 24, must be kept 
 uniform, the distance between the cutters should be capa- 
 ble of reduction to compensate for wear and for the loss 
 caused by grinding. This reduction in the distance D, is 
 often accomplished by removing the washers between the 
 cutter and steel washer as at C. 
 
 Combinations or gangs of form cutters work somewhat 
 similar to that indicated by Fig. 24 are shown in Figs. 21 
 and 25. These figures represent the milling of opposite 
 sides of small steel pieces, 3 inches long and ^ inch wide. 
 
 The vise jaws as shown are made to fit the piece. This 
 is a class of work which is usually done on the small Plain 
 Milling Machines and on which one boy can run several 
 machines. A similar class of work, made by a combina- 
 tion of two form and one ordinary milling cutter is shown 
 by Fig. 26. 
 
 Fig. 27 shows twin or straddle mills cutting a bolt head 
 or nut. When these mills are not at hand the work can 
 be milled by a milling cutter as in Fig. 28, or by an end 
 mill as in Fig. 29. In either case when nuts are milled 
 they are usually strung on a mandrel. 
 Fixtures For many kinds of work the fixture shown in. Fig. ^o is 
 
 for Small . 3 . 
 
 Work, convenient. It consists of a square piece of cast iron 
 several inches in length, bored to receive a shaft or spin- 
 dle to be split at one end or both ends as shown ; or to 
 have a series of holes or flat places made at right angles 
 with, or directly opposite each other. The slot runs the 
 entire length of the fixture and a small screw is inserted 
 at S to hold the work and prevent it from turning while in 
 the shell. 
 
 The fixture is held in the vise as in Fig. 30, and the 
 work does not have to be changed in the fixture, but after 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 FIG. 25. 
 
 FIG. 26. 
 
154 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 each cut is taken, the fixture is given one-quarter of a 
 turn, and each of the four sides of the bolt head or other 
 work brought to the mill. 
 
 If the work to be milled is three or six sided, the fixture 
 must be six sided. With two mills as in Fig 27, the 
 fixture would have to be changed in the vise only 
 three times to mill a six sided piece. A fixture can be 
 made without the slot and with a tapering hole for holding 
 the shanks of end mills, twist drills and milling arbors 
 while the tenons are milled. 
 Cutting Two mills can be put together with the teeth interlocked 
 
 Slots. . . 
 
 as in Fig. 31, and used in cutting slots. The advantage 
 of this arrangement is that the mills can be blocked apart 
 to keep the width of the cut always the same. 
 
 The end mill can also be used in cutting slots, as in 
 Fig. 32, the width of the slot being the same as the diame- 
 ter of the mill. Shafts that are to be slotted may be held 
 in the chuck on the spiral head, as shown in Fig. 32, one 
 end of the shaft being supported by the foot-stock centre. 
 In this case it is better to feed the work back and forth 
 the full length, than to drill holes at A and B ; for, unless 
 unusual care is taken in drilling, they are likely to be out 
 of line. By use of the cross feed the work may be moved 
 in until the seat is cut to the desired depth. For cutting 
 slot some prefer the Cotter mill, page 135. Each of these 
 mills when dropped directly into the work, leaves a teat 
 in the centre, but when the work is fed along to make the 
 slot, the Cotter mill will cut the teat off more easily than 
 the end mill. Neither a Cotter mill nor an end mill should 
 be used in making slots when they can be made with a 
 regular milling cutter, page 126 for milling cutters cut 
 faster and produce slots more uniform in size than either 
 end or Cotter mills. 
 
 The End Mill with centre cut, page 126, is useful 
 where it is desired to cut into the work with the end of 
 the mill, and then move along as in cams, grooves, etc., as 
 the teeth have a cutting edge, and are sharp on the inside, 
 and thus cut a path out from the first entering point. 
 
OK THK 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 . 27. 
 
 FIG. 2$. 
 
 FIG. 29. 
 
 FIG. 3O. 
 
156 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 They are also useful in taking heavy cuts, especially in 
 cast iron, by reason of the coarse teeth. 
 
 When, as in Fig. 32, the centre of the index spindle 
 must be at the same height as the cone spindle, the top of 
 the knee is brought to the line on the frame marked 
 centre. 
 
 Should it be desirable to go either above or below the 
 centre of the spindle a given distance, the graduated col- 
 lar on the lower screw shafts may be turned and set at 
 zero ; then by use of the following table of decimal equiva- 
 lents the distance may be readily determined in eighths, 
 sixteenths, etc., as every turn of the screw shaft will raise 
 or lower the knee one tenth or one hundred one thou- 
 sandths of an inch. 
 
 T SLOT CUTTER. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO 
 
 Fin. st. 
 
158 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 TABLE OF DECIMAL EQUIVALENTS. 
 
 8ths. 
 
 -,=.21875 
 
 A}=.265625 
 
 i 105 
 
 -&=. 28125 
 
 if .296875 
 
 f='.25 
 
 |i=. 34375 
 
 21 .328125 
 
 
 ^=.40625 
 
 |f=. 359375 
 
 |=.50 
 
 jf=. 46875 
 
 }=. 390625 
 
 
 -|Ji=. 53125 
 
 |J=. 421875 
 
 ^ .75 
 
 i|=. 59375 
 
 ||=. 453125 
 
 1=^875 
 
 |J=. 65625 
 ff=.71875 
 
 fi=. 484375 
 ff=. 515625 
 
 16ths. 
 
 |f=. 78125 
 |J=. 84375 
 
 f}=. 546875 
 |J=. 578125 
 
 T ^-zr.0625 
 
 |f=. 90625 
 
 f|=. 609375 
 
 ^=.1875 
 
 |i=. 96875 
 
 fj=. 640625 
 
 ^=.3125 
 
 
 |J=. 671875 
 
 T V=.4375 
 
 
 ff=.703125 
 
 ^=.5625 
 
 64ths. 
 
 4j = . 734375 
 
 H 6875 
 
 if=.8125 
 
 ^=.015625 
 
 49 .765625 
 |J=. 796875 
 
 |firz.9375 
 
 fa=. 078125 
 
 f}=-828125 
 
 32nds. 
 
 \=. 109375 
 
 -|}=. 859375 
 |}=. 890625 
 
 i _ 03125 
 
 ||=. 171875 
 
 f|=. 921875 
 
 -^-=.09375 
 5 2 = . 15625 
 
 ^|=. 203125 
 J}=. 234375 
 
 |i=. 953125 
 ff=. 984375 
 
 Fig. 33 shows a key-way, widest at the bottom, that is 
 cut by an angular shank mill similar to an end mill. 
 Such key-ways are used in a number of places, for instance, 
 where change gears are to be kept from slipping by a key. 
 If made in a single cut, and the mill be a delicate one, it 
 is preferable to feed by hand, as the resistance and prog- 
 ress can be easily felt, and the liability of breaking the 
 tool obviated. 
 
 In Fig. 34, at G, is seen the milling of an angular slot 
 for a slide. At D is shown the milling of a slide. At E 
 is the milling of a T slot. In this case a slot is first cut 
 to the full depth of the T slot and then finished by a mill 
 like that shown at E. A mill shown on page 156, with 
 every other tooth shortened at one end, lasts longer and 
 cuts faster in milling T slots than an ordinary end mill. 
 
UNiVL 
 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 FIG. 3C>. 
 
160 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 Some T slots are enclosed like F, Fig. 34, and to enter 
 this a hole is sometimes made at the back through the 
 body of the piece. 
 
 In milling cored T slots in cast iron, it is better to have 
 the mill small enough to cut only one side of the slot at a 
 time, and the side of the slot that is being milled should 
 move against the mill. If the mill is large enough to cut 
 both sides at once, then the teeth strike the scale first in 
 the side of the slot that runs with the mill and are soon 
 dulled. A full size mill is also likely to be broken by 
 catching upon high places in the side of the slot. It is 
 doubtful whether anything is gained by coring T slots that 
 are to be milled. 
 
 It is usually economical to do work like C, Fig. 34, with 
 a formed cutter, and anything like B, should certainly be 
 done with such a cutter. A very simple example of form 
 milling is seen at A, where a corner is rounded for a finish. 
 This method costs less and is more perfect than finishing 
 corners with a file, and for such work a mill of large 
 diameter used on an arbor is better than a shank mill, 
 unless the shank mill is run very fast. 
 
 Fig. 35 shows a method of cutting a slot or groove with 
 a milling cutter. The piece shown is cast iron and the 
 cuts are to a close limit. 
 
 Special A lathe carriage in which T slots have been milled* is 
 ' shown in Figure 36. The bearings of this carriage and 
 the ways of the lathe bed are also milled, and the method 
 of doing this work is indicated by Fig. 37. 
 
 The teeth of hair clippers shown in Fig. 38, are exam- 
 ples of work done on the No. 12 Plain Milling Machine. 
 
 In Fig. 39 is shown a method of milling a surface and 
 squaring one side of a projection on the surface. The 
 vise jaws are special to hold the work in the best manner 
 and to save time in setting it in position. 
 
 In Fig. 40 is seen the use of formed cutters in milling 
 rack teeth. The cutter shown is made in three parts and 
 each part cuts six teeth in the rack. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 161 
 
 FIG. 37. 
 
V 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 FIG. 38. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 iN^- '- ' ' : ' ' ';". 
 
 FIG. 39. 
 
 FIG. 4O. 
 

 164 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 FIG. 43. 
 
 FIG. 42. 
 
 FIG. 44, 
 
 FIG. 45. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 ,>-. \ 
 
 r 
 
 h-n-i^j| L ^1 
 
 
 
 (oY^^^^^ 
 
 V x.x' / vjwi . : &&%> 
 
 \^^/ \ w ^.:.............:...,.;.^y 
 
 FIG. 46. 
 
i66 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 FIG. 47. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 167 
 
 When a few pieces are to have round ends they may be 
 milled as in Fig. 41, the piece R being rotated about S 
 against the mill C. 
 
 Figs. 42 and 43 are representative operations that need 
 no description. 
 
 Fig. 44 sh6ws how a cylinder may be bored and one end 
 squared in a milling machine, the action of the parts of a 
 Plain Milling Machine being quite similar to that of a 
 boring machine. 
 
 Fig. 45 shows a method of milling between the arms of 
 hand wheels. 
 
 Fig. 46 shows samples of work done on the Vertical 
 Spindle Milling Machine. Many of these cuts may also 
 be made, though less conveniently, on machines with hori- 
 zontal spindles, and all may be made on a horizontal 
 machine with a Vertical Spindle Milling Attachment. 
 
 As an illustration of the number of operations and the 
 variety of work which can profitably be done on the mill- 
 ing machine in the manufacture of machine tools, we give universal 
 an approximate list of the milling operations performed in 
 our works in the manufacture of the spiral head of the 
 No. i Universal Milling Machine. Those marked with a 
 star require the use of an Index Head, but by far the 
 larger part of the work can be done without an Index 
 Head upon our various Universal or Plain Milling 
 Machines, and are examples of what may be practically 
 termed plain milling. 
 
1 68 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 LIST OF THE MILLING OPERATIONS IN THE MANUFACTURE OF THE 
 
 NO. 1 UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINE SPIRAL HEAD AND 
 
 FOOT-STOCK, 
 
 SPIRAL HEAD, FIG. 47. 
 
 NO. OF CUTS. 
 
 *Rougliing both sides and finishing top '. 3 
 
 Milling bottom and angle as shown in Fig. 48 1 
 
 Milling back end , 1 
 
 Milling around lug for worm 1 
 
 *Milling front end '. 1 
 
 *Bevel cut clearance for mitre gears 1 
 
 SPIRAL BOX, FIG. 51. 
 
 Milling inside bottom 1 
 
 Milling recess for nuts on bottom 2 
 
 Milling back side 1 
 
 *Milling around circle 1 
 
 *Milling around circle on top 2 
 
 Milling circular bolt slots 2 
 
 Milling for tongue in bottom 1 
 
 Milling complete sector 3 
 
 INDEX CRANK J, FIG. 3. 
 
 Milling both sides 2 
 
 Milling both edges with a form cutter .2 
 
 Milling slot as shown in Fig. 50 1 
 
 WORM SHAFT O, FIG. 3. 
 
 *Straddle cut for index crank 1 
 
 *Cut for worm key, Fig. 49 1 
 
 SPIRAL SHELL. 
 
 ^Milling dovetail key-way similar to Fig. 33 . . 1 
 
 FACE PLATE. 
 
 Gang cut ends and slot like Fig. 52 2 
 
 CENTRE. 
 
 Milling spot for set screw 1 
 
 MITRE GEAR COYER. 
 
 Milling complete 6 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 169 
 
 FIG. 48. 
 
 FIG. 49. 
 
 FIG. 50. 
 
I/O BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 MITRE GEAR BLOCK. 
 
 NO. OF CUTS. 
 
 Milling two gang cuts, like Fig. 53 2 
 
 SHEET STEELS. 
 
 Milling around the edges of worm wheel cover and mitre gear cover, 
 shown in black lines in Figs. 3 and 4 11 
 
 BACK CENTRE. 
 
 Milling bottom .- 1 
 
 Milling sides 2 
 
 BACK CENTRE STAND. 
 
 Milling face 1 
 
 Milling top 1 
 
 Milling back side 1 
 
 Milling bottom similar to Fig. 24 1 
 
 CENTRE REST. 
 
 Sawing off part of base 1 
 
 Milling bottom for tongue, similar to Fig. 24 1 
 
 LIST OF THE MILLING OPERATIONS IN THE MANUFACTURE OF THE 
 NO, 2 UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINE. 
 
 TABLE. 
 
 NO. OF CUTS. 
 
 Milling top, sides, bottom and edges 2 
 
 Milling Ys with angular cutter 2 
 
 Milling T slots similar to E, Fig. 34 2 
 
 Milling oil grooves 1 
 
 Milling one end similar to face milling 1 
 
 Milling table dog slot 2 
 
 SADDLE. 
 
 Milling bottom similar to Fig. 54 1 
 
 Milling top and sides .... 1 
 
 Milling Ys with angular cutter 1 
 
 CLAMP BED. 
 
 Milling top and sides similar to Fig. 53 1 
 
 Milling bottom similar to Fig. 54 1 
 
 Milling T slots 2 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 171 
 
 FIG. 51. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 52. 
 
 FIG. 53. 
 
 FIG. 54. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 173 
 
 KNEE. 
 
 NO. OF CUTS. 
 
 Milling top and edges, page 25 1 
 
 Milling base and slide complete 2 
 
 Milling clamp bed slides 2 
 
 Milling front end 1 
 
 TABLE STOP. 
 Milling table seat , 1 
 
 TABLE STOP GIBS. 
 Milling top and bottom 2 
 
 FEED TRIP SLIDE. 
 
 Straddle milling side and back similar to Fig. 27 1 
 
 Milling ends and slot 2 
 
 Milling front 1 
 
 FEED ROCKER. 
 
 Milling top 1 
 
 Milling bottom 1 
 
 FEED REVERSING LEVER. 
 
 Milling edges 1 
 
 Milling sides 1 
 
 TABLE SCREW BEARING. 
 Milling foot 1 
 
 FEED CLUTCH FORK. 
 
 Straddle milling sides 1 
 
 Straddle milling ends , 2 
 
 Milling inside 1 
 
 Milling round edges 2 
 
 TABLE SCREW. 
 
 Milling key- way (long) similar to page 174 2 
 
 Milling 3 key-ways (short) 3 
 
 CONE GEAR GUARD (CENTRE). 
 Milling ends 1 
 
 SPINDLE AND CONE GEAR GUARDS (FRONT AND REAR.) 
 Milling ends 1 
 
 CLUTCH SLEEVE. 
 Milling slots 2 
 
 KNEE SCREW. 
 Milling key- way 1 
 
174 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 175 
 
 KNEE SHAFT. 
 
 NO. OF CUTS. 
 
 Milling key-way 1 
 
 CROSS FEED SCREW. 
 
 Milling key- way 1 
 
 Milling square on end 4 
 
 SPINDLE. 
 Milling key-ways 3 
 
 STOP ROD. 
 Milling key-way 1 
 
 VERTICAL FEED SHAFT. 
 Milling key-way 1 
 
 KNEE STOPS. 
 Milling clamp slot 1 
 
 TABLE DOG. 
 
 Milling front side 1 
 
 Milling back side 1 
 
 Milling form on top 1 
 
 CONE. 
 Milling dog slot 1 
 
 CONE DOG BOLT. 
 Milling flats 2 
 
 ARM CENTRE. 
 
 Milling key-way 1 
 
 Milling knob slot 1 
 
 LOWER FEED SHAFT SLEEVE. 
 Milling key-way 1 
 
 INTERNAL FEED PULLEY SLEEVE. 
 Milling key-way 1 
 
 SADDLE SWIVEL. 
 
 Milling key-way 1 
 
 Milling slot 1 
 
 CLUTCH GEAR BEARING CAPS R. AND L. 
 Milling seat 2 
 
 SPINDLE FRONT BOX. 
 Milling slot 1 
 
 SPINDLE REAR BOX. 
 Milling slot .1 
 
176 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 USE OF MILLING MACHINES, 
 
 INDEXING. 
 
 Use of The first office of the indexing head stock or spiral 
 
 Indexing 
 
 Head to head, as mentioned in the description of the machines is 
 
 Divide / t 
 
 Periphery to divide the periphery of a piece of work into a number 
 
 into Equal of equal parts, and in connection with the foot stock, it 
 
 also enables the milling machine to be used for work 
 
 sometimes done on planer centres and on gear cutting 
 
 machines. 
 
 Direct As the index spindle may be revolved by the crank, 
 
 Indexing. 
 
 and as forty turns of the crank make one revolution of 
 the spindle, to find how many turns of the crank are 
 necessary for a certain division of the work, or what is the 
 same thing, for a certain division of a revolution of the 
 spindle, forty is divided by the number of the divisions 
 which are desired. The rule then, may be said to be, 
 divide forty by the number of divisions to be made and 
 the quotient will be the number of turns, or the part of 
 a turn, of the crank, which will give each desired division. 
 Applying this rule to make forty divisions the crank would 
 be turned completely around once to obtain each division, 
 or to obtain twenty divisions it would be turned twice. 
 When, to obtain the necessary divisions, the crank has to 
 index be turned only a part of the way around, an index plate 
 is used. For example : If the work is to be divided into 
 eighty divisions the crank must be turned one-half way 
 around, and an index plate with an even number of 
 holes in one of the circles would be selected, it being 
 necessary only to have two holes opposite to each other in 
 the plate. If the work is to be divided into three divisions 
 an index plate should be selected which has a circle with 
 a number of holes that can be divided by three, as fifteen 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 177 
 
 FIG. 55. 
 
178 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 or eighteen in Fig. 55, the numbers on the index plates 
 indicating the number of holes in the various circles. 
 Sector. The sector is of service in obviating the necessity of 
 counting the holes at each partial rotation or turn of the 
 crank, and to illustrate its use it may be supposed that it 
 is desired to divide the work into 144 divisions. Dividing 
 40 by 1 44 the result, T 5 g, shows that the index crank must 
 be moved T 5 - of a turn to obtain each of the 144 divisions. 
 An index plate with a circle containing eighteen holes or 
 a multiple of eighteen, is selected, and the sector is set to 
 measure off five spaces or the corresponding multiple, 
 ten spaces for example, in a circle with thirty-six holes. 
 When the sector is set it is held in place by the screw C, 
 Fig. 55. In setting the sector it should be remembered 
 that there must always be one more hole between the 
 arms than there are spaces to be counted or measured off. 
 Starting with the crank pin in the hole B, for example, a 
 cut would be made in the work and then the crank would 
 be turned and the pin brought into the hole at A and a 
 second cut made in the work. The sector would then be 
 moved to the position shown at dotted line, that is ,the arm 
 would be brought against the pin in the crank. When the 
 third cut is to be made the crank would be turned and the 
 pin brought to the hole D. The next step would bring the 
 pin to the hole E, and so on. When the operation has 
 been repeated 144 times one revolution of the spindle 
 will have been made. The required number of turns of 
 the crank for a large number of divisions may be readily 
 ascertained from the accompanying index tables. 
 Effect of If the angle of elevation of the spiral head spindle is 
 Angle o'f changed during the progress of the work, the work must 
 of Spindle, be rotated slightly to bring it back to the proper position, 
 as when the spindle is elevated or depressed, the worm 
 wheel is rotated about the worm, and the effect is the same 
 as if the worm were turned in the opposite direction. 
 Examples A simple use of the index centres is that of milling bolt 
 Miii?ng' heads, nuts, etc. Those shown in Figs. 27, 28 and 29, for 
 
 Bolt Heads. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 179 
 
 INDEX TABLE. 
 
 ,i 
 
 IS 
 
 X 
 
 .j. 
 
 $M 
 
 | 
 
 3 
 
 12 
 
 EH a 
 
 5 
 
 ll 
 
 n 
 
 o 
 
 O jj 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 "o ^ 
 
 oo 
 
 ta 
 
 
 
 
 
 fi 0) 
 
 .8 g 
 
 H 43 *?? 
 
 Jj.3 
 
 Is 
 
 jk*-'w 
 
 || 
 
 P O 
 
 S r-t "^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 S 2 
 
 S *- *~* 
 
 g 
 
 g -a 
 
 ^ -5 O 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 rj . O 
 
 
 
 55 
 
 525 
 
 _ 
 
 ^ 
 
 fe 
 
 ><A 
 
 2 
 
 MY 
 
 20 
 
 C5 
 
 49 
 
 IT'V 
 
 3 
 
 39 
 
 13^f 
 
 36 
 
 27 
 
 1 3 
 
 4 
 
 ANY 
 
 10 
 
 37 
 
 37 
 
 1* 
 
 5 
 
 <t 
 
 8 
 
 38 
 
 19 
 
 
 6 
 
 39 
 
 6|| 
 
 39 
 
 39 
 
 1 i 
 
 7 
 
 49 
 
 5|_| 
 
 40 
 
 ANY 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 ANY 
 
 5 4 
 
 41 
 
 41 
 
 ff 
 
 9 
 
 27 
 
 4|. 
 
 42 
 
 21 
 
 -I 1 
 
 n 
 
 10 
 
 ANY 
 
 4 
 
 43 
 
 43 
 
 <i i 
 H 
 
 11 
 
 33 
 
 32. j. 
 
 44 
 
 33 
 
 IS- 
 
 12 
 
 39 
 
 313. 
 
 45 
 
 27 
 
 
 13 
 
 39 
 
 3_3 g . 
 
 46 
 
 23 
 
 ll * 7 
 
 14 
 
 49 
 
 2ff 
 
 47 
 
 47 
 
 ^ o 
 
 15 
 
 39 
 
 2|| 
 
 48 
 
 18 
 
 H 47 
 
 16 
 
 20 
 
 
 49 
 
 49 
 
 1 o 
 
 17 
 
 17 
 
 2A 
 
 50 
 
 20 
 
 1 () 
 "So 
 
 18 
 
 27 
 
 
 52 
 
 39 
 
 
 19 
 
 19 
 
 
 
 54 
 
 27 
 
 If 3 
 
 20 
 
 ANY 
 
 2 
 
 55 
 
 33 
 
 II 
 
 21 
 
 21 
 
 l 1 !- 
 
 56 
 
 49 
 
 
 22 
 
 33 
 
 1 ft 
 
 58 
 
 29 
 
 T ( J 
 
 23 
 
 23 
 
 
 60 
 
 39 
 
 -If 
 
 24 
 
 39 
 
 1 2 4 
 
 62 
 
 31 
 
 3 u 
 2 
 
 25 
 
 20 
 
 HI 
 
 64 
 
 16 
 
 H *' 
 
 26 
 
 39 
 
 ill 
 
 65 
 
 39 
 
 H 
 
 27 
 
 27 
 
 
 66 
 
 33 
 
 o y 
 
 H 
 
 28 
 
 49 
 
 l|i 
 
 68 
 
 17 
 
 3 3 
 
 H 
 
 29 
 
 29 
 
 -^ii 
 
 70 
 
 49 
 
 H 
 
 30 
 
 39 
 
 11.3. 
 
 72 
 
 27 
 
 }4 
 
 31 
 
 31 
 
 ^ 9 T 
 
 74 
 
 37 
 
 If 
 
 32 
 
 20 
 
 1^5_ 
 
 75 
 
 15 
 
 ft 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 1 3 T_ 
 
 76 
 
 19 
 
 1 a 
 
 34 
 
 17 
 
 IA 
 
 78 
 
 39 
 
 " l 
 
 
i8o 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 INDEX TABLE. 
 
 > 
 
 s 
 
 o 
 
 Is 
 
 S.2 
 
 3 to 
 fc 
 
 Number of Holes 
 in the Index 
 Circle. 
 
 Number of Turns 
 of the Crank. 
 
 . 
 
 Number of Divi- 
 sions. 
 
 Number of Holes 
 in the Index 
 Circle. 
 
 Number of Turns 
 of the Crank. 
 
 80 
 
 20 
 
 H 
 
 164 
 
 41 
 
 tt 
 
 82 
 
 41 
 
 H 
 
 165 
 
 33 
 
 A 
 
 84 
 
 21 
 
 H 
 
 168 
 
 21 
 
 A 
 
 85 
 
 17 
 
 I\ 
 
 170 
 
 17 
 
 T 4 7 
 
 86 
 
 43 
 
 H 
 
 172 
 
 43 
 
 H 
 
 88 
 
 33 
 
 H 
 
 180 
 
 27 
 
 A 
 
 90 
 
 27 
 
 44 
 
 184 
 
 23 
 
 A 
 
 92 
 
 23 
 
 H 
 
 185 
 
 37 
 
 -fr 
 
 94 
 
 47 
 
 if 
 
 188 
 
 47 
 
 
 
 95 
 
 19 
 
 TV 
 
 190 
 
 19 
 
 TV 
 
 98 
 
 49 
 
 H 
 
 195 
 
 39 
 
 A 
 
 100 
 
 20 
 
 A 
 
 196 
 
 49 
 
 H 
 
 104 
 
 39 
 
 H 
 
 200 
 
 20 
 
 A 
 
 105 
 
 21 
 
 
 205 
 
 41 
 
 A 
 
 108 
 
 27 
 
 ii 
 
 210 
 
 21 
 
 A 
 
 110 
 
 33 
 
 2 
 
 215 
 
 43 
 
 A 
 
 -115 
 
 23 
 
 A 
 
 216 
 
 27 
 
 A 
 
 116 
 
 29 
 
 i* 
 
 220 
 
 33 
 
 A 
 
 120 
 
 39 
 
 
 
 230 
 
 23 
 
 A 
 
 124 
 
 31 
 
 
 
 232 
 
 29 
 
 A 
 
 128 
 
 16 
 
 A 
 
 235 
 
 47 
 
 A 
 
 130 
 
 39 
 
 it 
 
 240 
 
 18 
 
 T 3 ? 
 
 132 
 
 33 
 
 if 
 
 245 
 
 49 
 
 A 
 
 135 
 
 27 
 
 A 
 
 248 
 
 31 
 
 A 
 
 136 
 
 17 
 
 A 
 
 260 
 
 39 
 
 A 
 
 140 
 
 49 
 
 H 
 
 264 
 
 33 
 
 & 
 
 144 
 
 18 
 
 T 5 T 
 
 270 
 
 27 
 
 A 
 
 145 
 
 29 
 
 A 
 
 280 
 
 49 
 
 A 
 
 148 
 
 37 
 
 H 
 
 290 
 
 29 
 
 A 
 
 150 
 
 15 
 
 T 4 ! 
 
 296 
 
 37 
 
 A 
 
 152 
 
 19 
 
 A 
 
 300 
 
 15 
 
 A 
 
 155 
 
 31 
 
 A 
 
 310 
 
 31 
 
 A 
 
 156 
 
 39 
 
 i* 
 
 312 
 
 39 
 
 A 
 
 160 
 
 20 
 
 A 
 
 360 
 
 18 
 
 A 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 181 
 
 FIG. 
 
 FIG. 57. 
 
 FIG. 58. 
 
 FJG. 59. 
 
1 82 ' BROWN A SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 instance, could be milled by being held on the spiral head 
 instead of the fixture previously described. 
 Dividing Among work commonly divided on the index centres are 
 
 Cutters, etc. 
 
 saws, page 126; screw slotting cutters, page 126; and a 
 large variety of straight tooth mills, as shown on page 126. 
 Cutting the teeth of ratchets represents a similar use of the 
 centres. In milling teeth of angular cutters the index 
 spindle can be set as shown in Fig. 56, and when the 
 spindle and cutter are in this position the knee of the 
 machine is raised by the vertical feed. Fig. 57 shows 
 that the same cutter may be used for making a right or 
 left hand mill, in one case the feed being vertical and the 
 other horizontal. 
 
 Fluting The fluting or grooving of taps and reamers is another 
 Reamers, kind of work in which index centres are used. A table 
 showing the tap and reamer cutters to be used in grooving 
 reamers is given in our catalogue, different cutters being 
 used for a certain size reamer than for the same size tap. 
 The accompanying table gives the figures for setting taps 
 sidewise and also for the depths of groove. These figures 
 will be found convenient, but are not given to be followed 
 absolutely, for mechanics have different opinions as to the 
 best shape and the proper depth of groove in taps. 
 
 The columns in the table as marked refer to the special 
 tap cutters, the shape of which are shown in Fig. 58, and 
 tap and reamer cutters Fig. 59. One class of our twist 
 drill cutters have a round edge, and can also be used in 
 grooving taps. 
 
 The top of the table of the machine when doing this 
 work is moved sidewise along the distance A, between B B 
 and e, which is .125 of an inch, as given in the column 
 under A. The work is next set for the depth of the cut 
 d, which is given in the table under the column d, and is 
 .2 of an inch. This depth is read off by the graduated 
 collar on the vertical feed shaft. 
 
 The depth of groove cut in a tap by a special tap cutter 
 is .2 of the diameter of the tap. The depth of groove cut 
 by a tap and reamer cutter is .23 of the diameter of the tap. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 Table for Setting when Cutting with Special Tap Cut 
 ters, or with Tap and Reamer Cutters. 
 
 
 
 Value of A, d and A', d' 
 
 
 Diameter 
 
 No. 
 
 
 Diameter 
 
 of 
 
 of 
 
 
 of 
 
 Tap. 
 
 Cutter. 
 
 A= 
 
 d= 
 
 A'= 
 
 d'= 
 
 Cutter. 
 
 i 1 
 
 .025 
 
 .025 
 
 .000 
 
 .028 
 
 If 
 
 A 
 
 2 
 
 .003 
 
 .031 
 
 * 
 
 .035 
 
 a 
 
 A' 
 
 u 
 
 .018 
 
 .037 
 
 .000 
 
 .043 
 
 it 
 
 A 
 
 a 
 
 .034 
 
 .043 
 
 .015 
 
 .050 
 
 il 
 
 I 
 
 u 
 
 .050 
 
 .050 
 
 .031 
 
 .057 
 
 it 
 
 A 
 
 3 
 
 .028 
 
 .056 
 
 .015 
 
 .065 
 
 1| 
 
 A 
 
 a 
 
 .043 
 
 .062 
 
 .031 
 
 .072 
 
 U 
 
 I 
 
 a 
 
 .075 
 
 .075 
 
 .062 
 
 .086 
 
 it 
 
 A 
 
 4 
 
 .031 
 
 .087 
 
 .031 
 
 .100 
 
 2 
 
 i 
 
 u 
 
 .062 
 
 .100 
 
 .062 
 
 .115 
 
 a 
 
 A 
 
 u 
 
 .093 
 
 .112 
 
 .093 
 
 .129 
 
 a 
 
 1 
 
 it 
 
 .125 
 
 .125 
 
 .125 
 
 .144 
 
 n 
 
 tt 
 
 5 
 
 .081 
 
 .137 
 
 .093 
 
 .158 
 
 2} 
 
 f 
 
 " 
 
 .112 
 
 .150 
 
 .125 
 
 .172 
 
 u 
 
 i* 
 
 a 
 
 .143 
 
 .162 
 
 .156 
 
 .187 
 
 a 
 
 
 " 
 
 .175 
 
 .175 
 
 .187 
 
 .200 
 
 a 
 
 If 
 
 G 
 
 .093 
 
 .187 
 
 .125 
 
 .215 
 
 2i 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 .125 
 
 .200 
 
 .156 
 
 .230 
 
 a 
 
 IA 
 
 
 
 .156 
 
 .212 
 
 .187 
 
 .245 
 
 < 
 
 i* 
 
 4. 
 
 .187 
 
 .225 
 
 .218 
 
 .258 
 
 i 
 
 IA 
 
 U 
 
 .218 
 
 .237 
 
 .250 
 
 .273 
 
 i 
 
 4 
 
 (i 
 
 .250 
 
 .250 
 
 .281 
 
 .287 
 
 i 
 
 IT'TT 
 
 7 
 
 .168 
 
 .262 
 
 .218 
 
 .300 
 
 2c 
 
 1| 
 
 " 
 
 .200 
 
 .275 
 
 .250 
 
 .316 
 
 i 
 
 IA 
 
 .231 
 
 .287 
 
 .281 
 
 .330 
 
 ' 
 
 li 
 
 .262 
 
 .300 
 
 .312 
 
 .345 
 
 i 
 
 4 
 
 u 
 
 .293 
 
 .312 
 
 .344 
 
 .359 
 
 < 
 
 It 
 
 (i 
 
 .325 
 
 .325 
 
 .375 
 
 .373 
 
 a 
 
 IH 
 
 8 
 
 .243 
 
 .337 
 
 .312 
 
 .388 
 
 2f 
 
 12 
 
 a 
 
 .275 
 
 .350 
 
 .344 
 
 .400 
 
 it 
 
 15 
 
 a 
 
 .337 
 
 .375 
 
 .406 
 
 .430 
 
 U 
 
 2 
 
 a 
 
 .400 
 
 .400 
 
 .468 
 
 .460 
 
 il 
 
 * No. 2 Regular Cutter, T y thick. 
 
184 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 The machine, as a rule, is fed automatically while cut- 
 ting, and after each cut is taken the index crank is turned 
 as previously described. 
 Screw Fisr. 60 shows a tool used in a screw machine or turret 
 
 Machine 
 
 Tool, lathe. The three views show the results of the various 
 
 Milling Machine cuts. 
 
 Cutting In cutting gears care must be taken to have the cutter 
 central with the index centres, and to have the cut the 
 exact depth required. A good way of testing the setting 
 is to cut a groove in a piece on the centres, then shift the 
 piece end for end and try the groove upon the cutter. A 
 good method of holding the gear blanks is on an arbor 
 with a taper shank which fits in the index spindle, the 
 outer end of the arbor being supported by the foot stock 
 centre. Frequently in cutting gears we use a shank arbor 
 with expanding bushing and a nut on the arbor at each 
 end of the bushing, one nut forcing the bushing up on the 
 arbor and holding the gear blank, while the other pushes 
 the bushing off the taper and releases the gear when 
 finished. If the common arbor and dog are used, care 
 should be taken that the dog does not spring the arbor. 
 The screws, Fig. 2, may be used to hold the dog so that 
 there shall be no back lash between the index spindle and 
 the work. The depth of the cut can be gauged from the 
 outside of the blank, or, if desired, marked on the side by 
 a gear tooth depth gauge. In cutting gears, when the 
 blank has been placed in position it is raised by the ele- 
 vating screw until it just touches the cutter. The gradu- 
 ated collar on the vertical feed shaft is placed on zero and 
 the blank moved horizontally from the cutter. Then the 
 work is raised the number of thousandths of an inch 
 required for the depth of tooth. 
 
 In our catalogue we give the depth of gear teeth of a 
 number of pitches, directions regarding sizing and cutting 
 of gear wheels, formulae for determining the dimensions 
 of small gears by diametral pitch, also directions for 
 selecting involute and epicycloidal gear cutters for any 
 given pitch. The catalogue contains as well a number of 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 F 16. CO. 
 
1 86 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 plain rules for determining various dimensions of gears. 
 More complete information on this subject is given in our 
 " Practical Treatise on Gearing," and " Formulas in 
 Gearing." 
 worm For several years we have milled the faces of worm 
 
 Wheels. 
 
 wheels in our Universal Milling Machines, as this costs 
 less and is better than turning them in an engine lathe. 
 The operation will be understood from Fig. 6 1 , one part of 
 which shows a segment of a spur wheel, and the other 
 part S, a segment of a worm wheel blank. 
 
 The practice involved in cutting worm wheels is seen in 
 Fig. 62. 
 
 The index centres are set central with the cutter on the 
 line C D, as in cutting spur gears. The arbor holding the 
 worm wheel blank is put on the centres, and by moving 
 the table lengthwise the centre of the face of the worm 
 wheel is set under the centre of the cutter spindle A B. 
 The table stop is put on so that the table will not move, 
 then the saddle is set to the angle of the teeth as seen by 
 the lines E and C D, and the vertical feed is used in cut- 
 ting the work. Worm wheels can be hobbed in the Uni- 
 versal Milling Machine. 
 
 The wheel can be hobbed to the right depth by setting 
 a rule on the top of the knee and measuring up to the line 
 marked centre on the side of the frame, for when the back 
 of the knee is at this line the index centres are at the 
 same height as the centre of the cone spindle, the meas- 
 urement from the knee to this line being, in other words, 
 the distance between the centres of the worm and wheel. 
 When hobbing a worm wheel the shaft of which is at 
 right angles with the axis of the worm, the spiral bed should 
 be set at zero. 
 
 On page 187 is shown a worm hob that is made in the 
 same manner as a formed cutter, and can be sharpened 
 by grinding without changing its form. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 i8 7 
 
 FIG. 61. 
 
 FIG. 62. 
 
 WORM HOB WITH RELIEVED TEETH. 
 
l88 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 DSE OF MILLING MACHINES, 
 
 COMPOUND INDEXING. 
 
 in This system of indexing is not ordinarily used to any 
 Defined. g re at extent. Frequently, however, it is desired to divide 
 the work into divisions other than those which can be 
 attained by direct indexing, method described on page 176, 
 from the index plates furnished with the machine. 
 
 In this case the method termed compound indexing is 
 used ; a method which has been considered quite fully by 
 Messrs. Fred J. Miller, Walter Gribben, G. Schneider and 
 J. V. Hamilton, and explained by them in contributions to 
 the "American Machinist," October 3ist, December i2th, 
 1889, and January i6th, May 22nd, July iyth, August i4th, 
 and October i6th, 1890. 
 
 On the following pages 'we offer tables, for which we are 
 chiefly indebted to the kindness of Mr. Walter Gribben, 
 by the use of which these results can be obtained with the 
 index plates furnished with the machines. 
 
 The method of combining the two index settings is indi- 
 cated by the signs plus and minus ; the plus sign showing 
 that the two indexings are added together, or that the 
 movement of the work in both indexings is in the same 
 direction, while the minus sign shows that we take the dif- 
 ference between the two indexings, or that we move one 
 indexing in one direction and the second indexing in the 
 opposite direction, the principle in making the calculations 
 being simply the addition or subtraction of fractions. The 
 denominators of the fractions indicate which circles of 
 holes are used in the index plates. 
 
 Direct indexing is obtained by moving the pin straight 
 ahead on a single circle. Tables are given on pages 179 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 189 
 
 and 1 80, showing the divisions that can be obtained by 
 direct indexing. 
 
 If desired special index plates can be furnished, but in 
 most cases it will be found cheaper and quicker to use the 
 compound indexing method, as described above. 
 
 To illustrate the manner of using the machine in com- Manner of 
 
 Using the 
 
 pound indexing, it may be supposed that we desire to divide Machines. 
 the work into 69 parts. Reference to the table, page 191, 
 shows that the work is moved through 21 spaces, or 
 holes in the 23 hole circle and then turned in the oppo- 
 site direction 1 1 holes in the 33 hole circle of one of 
 the index plates. The first movement is made in the ordi- 
 nary manner. The stop or back pin is placed in the 33 
 hole circle, the index crank pin is pulled out of the 
 23 hole circle, and the index crank is turned through 
 21 holes in the desired direction, the holes being 
 measured by the sector. For the second movement, the 
 index crank pin is left in the 23 hole circle, the back pin 
 is pulled back from the plate, and as the minus sign is 
 given in the table, the crank is turned 1 1 holes in the 
 direction opposite to that of the former movement. In 
 this part of the indexing the index plate and crank turn 
 together, and as there is no sector on the back of the 
 plate, the holes or spaces have to be counted directly 
 in the plate. Had the plus sign been given, as in the 
 indexing to obtain 77 divisions of the work, both move- 
 ments of the crank would have been in the same direction. 
 Ordinarily the order of the movements is not material and 
 if more convenient for any reason, the back pin could 
 usually be withdrawn first, and the movement described 
 as the second could be made first. In some instances 
 indeed, for example, in dividing the work into 174, 272 or 
 273 parts, the outer circle is naturally used first. 
 
 The correctness of the operations indicated by the table Proof of 
 
 Correct- 
 
 is easily appreciated when the fractions are added or sub- ness of the 
 
 Moves. 
 
 tracted. For example : to divide the work into 69 parts 
 thefiguresarefl ^==fi i = ff ft = |f; and 
 this equals one division of the work or the desired result, 
 
190 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 as there are 40 teeth in the worm wheel, and to obtain 
 1-69 of a complete revolution it is desired that 40 should 
 be divided by 69. 
 
 To obtain 77 divisions the figures are ^ 9 T -]-.^= I -J- 
 TY = -7-7- -f- -fr = T~T == one division. 
 
 This method of calculation (although fractions are 
 involved) is essentially the same as that described on page 
 
 .76. 
 
 A PPXI- The next table gives the movements for divisions of the 
 indexings WO rk (absolutely, or within close limits) from 50 to 250. 
 " 1 P u " d Where only one indexing is indicated the figures are taken 
 from the tables on pages 179 and 180, and where abso- 
 lutely correct results are shown by the compound index- 
 ing, the figures are taken from the last table. In regard 
 to this table, Mr. Gribben writes as follows : 
 
 " The figures in the first column give the desired num- 
 ber of teeth, or the nearest approximations to the desired 
 number of teeth, which approximations are so near in the 
 instance of 51, 53, 57, 61,67, 71,73, 79, 81, etc., that the 
 error may be safely neglected. 
 
 The figures in the second column give the moves for the 
 index shaft, in opposite directions when connected by a 
 sign, and in the same direction when connected by a -[- 
 sign. 
 
 The figures in the third column show the error in posi- 
 tion of the last space cut if the cross-slide be not moved, 
 and a gear of i diametral pitch is being cut. A i pitch gear 
 is larger than would be cut on a small machine, but is 
 taken for the reason that from these figures can be com- 
 puted the the error for finer pitches. This is obtained by 
 dividing the error for i pitch by the number of the finer 
 pitch, and the result (if of sufficient magnitude to be taken 
 into account) distributed up around the circumference 
 as best it may. 
 
 For instance, if we wish to cut 112 teeth of 6 pitch, the 
 error in the last cut would be about .00 1 inch, which might 
 be corrected by moving the cross-slide .0001 inch after 
 every n cuts. (See page 196.) 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 Compound Index Movementson the Nos. 1, 2, 3 and 4, Design 
 
 1893, Universal Milling Machines. (Absolute and 
 
 Approximate.) 
 
 NO. OF TEETH. 
 
 MOVES. 
 
 ERROR ON ONE DIAM- 
 ETRAL PITCH GEAR. 
 
 TIMES AROUND. 
 
 50. 
 
 tt 
 
 
 
 51.0001 
 
 8|f if 
 
 .0002 
 
 11 
 
 52. 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 53.0001 
 
 6ff-A 
 
 .0002 
 
 
 54. 
 
 It 
 
 
 
 55. 
 
 tt 
 
 
 
 56. 
 
 It 
 
 
 
 56.9999 
 
 4|t + A 
 
 .0003 
 
 7 
 
 58. 
 
 It 
 
 
 
 58.9997 
 
 W + it 
 
 .0009 
 
 11 
 
 60. 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 60.9999 
 
 3tf + A 
 
 .0003 
 
 6 
 
 62. 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 62.9994 
 
 4^9. _|_ 1| 
 
 .0019 
 
 8 
 
 64. 
 
 it 
 
 
 
 65. 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 66. 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 67.0002 
 
 2|| -f | 
 
 .0005 
 
 5 
 
 68. 
 6Q 
 
 it 
 
 
 
 Ut7. 
 
 70. 
 
 If 
 
 
 
 70.9999 
 
 3f T ft 
 
 .0005 
 
 6 
 
 72. 
 
 if 
 
 
 
 73.0001 
 
 of f A 
 
 .0002 
 
 12 
 
 74. 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 75. 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 76. 
 
 it 
 
 
 
 77. 
 
 * 9 T + A 
 
 
 
 78. 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 79.0002 
 
 2ft + A 
 
 .0005 
 
 6 
 
 80. 
 
 iff 
 
 
 
 80.9999 
 
 5 ? 5 r A 
 
 .0003 
 
 10 
 
 82. 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 83.0003 
 
 3f f A 
 
 .0011 
 
 8 
 
 84. 
 
 it 
 
 
 
 85. 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 86. 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 87. 
 
 H-tt 
 
 
 1 
 
 88. 
 
 if 
 
 
 
 89.0001 
 
 3|| ^ 
 
 .0005. 
 
 8 
 
 90. 
 
 W 
 
 
 
192 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 Compound Index Movements on the Nos. 1, 2, 3 and 4, Design 
 
 1893, Universal Milling Machines. (Absolute and 
 
 Approximate.) 
 
 NO. OF TEETH. 
 
 MOVES. 
 
 ERROR ON ONE DIAM- 
 ETRAL PITCH GEAR. 
 
 TIMES AROUND. 
 
 91. 
 
 A + it 
 
 
 
 92. 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 93. 
 
 3111 
 TTl i ~5~5 
 
 
 
 94. 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 95. 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 96. 
 
 A + A 
 
 
 
 96.9999 
 
 4|| TS 
 
 .0004 
 
 11 
 
 98. 
 
 it 
 
 
 
 99. 
 
 tf-A 
 
 
 
 100. 
 
 . A 
 
 
 
 101.0001 
 
 4f f it 
 
 .0003 
 
 11 
 
 102.0002 
 
 4j| -fa 
 
 .0007 
 
 11 
 
 103.0003 
 
 i A + if 
 
 .0010 
 
 4 
 
 104. 
 
 it 
 
 
 
 105. 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 106.0003 
 
 aff + tt 
 
 .0009 
 
 9 
 
 107.0004 
 
 2ft -A 
 
 .0012 
 
 7 
 
 108. 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 108.9998 
 
 2it + A 
 
 .0006 
 
 7 
 
 110. 
 
 it 
 
 
 
 111.0001 
 
 3|9 _]_ ^ 
 
 .0003 
 
 11 
 
 111.9980 
 
 4 if it 
 
 .0063 
 
 11 
 
 112.9999 
 
 3|f-it 
 
 .0004 
 
 9 
 
 113.9996 
 
 Hf + It 
 
 .0014 
 
 7 
 
 115. 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 116. 
 
 it 
 
 
 
 117.0001 
 
 
 .0002 
 
 20 
 
 117.9994 
 
 l T 8 -g 4- ft 
 
 .0019 
 
 5 
 
 119.0005 
 
 3A-H 
 
 .0015 
 
 8 
 
 120. 
 
 it 
 
 
 
 120.9982 
 
 lit -it 
 
 .0055 
 
 3 
 
 122.0003 
 
 
 .0008 
 
 11 
 
 123.0006 
 
 4t + H 
 
 .0018 
 
 5 
 
 124. 
 
 
 
 
 125.0010 
 
 II 
 
 .0031 
 
 8 
 
 125.9985 
 
 3i.| ^ 
 
 .0047 
 
 11 
 
 127.0002 
 
 2ft + it 
 
 .0006 
 
 9 
 
 128. 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 128.9997 
 
 
 .0011 
 
 19 
 
 130. 
 
 if 
 
 
 
 130.9990 
 
 2|o _^_ 2^ 
 
 .0031 
 
 11 
 
 132. 
 
 it 
 
 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 193 
 
 Compound Index Movements on the Nos. 1, 2, 3 and 4, Design 
 
 1893, Universal Milling Machines. (Absolute and 
 
 Approximate.) 
 
 NO. OF TEETH. 
 
 MOVES. 
 
 ERROR ON ONE DIAM- 
 ETRAL PITCH GEAR. 
 
 TIMES AROUND. 
 
 133.0006 
 
 3ft - it 
 
 .0020 
 
 11 
 
 134.0002 
 
 8*f + it 
 
 .0007 
 
 13 
 
 135. 
 
 2 8 T 
 
 
 
 136. 
 
 TV 
 
 
 
 137.0001 
 
 8H-A 
 
 .0005 
 
 11 
 
 138. 
 
 44 -A 
 
 
 
 138.9998 
 
 m + ft 
 
 .0005 
 
 11 
 
 140. 
 
 it 
 
 
 
 141.0007 
 
 Ht + ft 
 
 .0022 
 
 8 
 
 141.9998 
 
 4A + it 
 
 .0006 
 
 15 
 
 142.9991 
 
 Iff -it 
 
 .0029 
 
 5 
 
 144. 
 
 T 5 8 
 
 
 
 145. 
 
 2 8 9 
 
 
 
 145.9994 
 
 2A-A- 
 
 .0018 
 
 7 
 
 147. 
 
 it - A 
 
 
 
 148. 
 
 if 
 
 
 
 149.0003 
 
 ^A A 
 
 .0010 
 
 11 
 
 150. 
 
 T 4 5 
 
 
 
 151.0008 
 
 142. ^ 
 
 .0024 
 
 7 
 
 152. 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 153.0002 
 
 2|5 ? ^ 
 
 .0005 
 
 11 
 
 154. 
 
 ^8_ J^ 
 
 
 
 155. 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 156. 
 
 it 
 
 
 
 157.0003 
 
 2ff + A 
 
 .0011 
 
 11 
 
 157.9990 
 
 
 .0031 
 
 19 
 
 159.0002 
 
 O 7 1 1 6 
 z "S"f 1 ? 
 
 .0007 
 
 10 
 
 160. 
 
 
 
 
 161.0016 
 
 24* -A 
 
 .0051 
 
 9 
 
 161.9982 
 
 
 .0057 
 
 7 
 
 162.9996 
 
 3^. || 
 
 .0013 
 
 11 
 
 164. 
 
 if 
 
 
 
 165. 
 
 T5 
 
 
 
 165.9989 
 
 HI + it 
 
 .0035 
 
 7 
 
 166.9995 
 
 2A + A 
 
 .0015 
 
 9 
 
 168. 
 
 
 
 
 169.0005 
 
 iff + it , 
 
 .0016 
 
 9 
 
 170. 
 
 
 
 
 170.9997 
 
 iff + A 
 
 .0008 
 
 7 
 
 172. 
 
 if 
 
 
 
 173.0003 
 
 1A + ii 
 
 .0011- 
 
 6 
 
194 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 Compound Index Movements on the Nos. 1, 2, 3 and 4, Design 
 
 1893, Universal Milling Machines. (Absolute and 
 
 Approximate.) 
 
 NO. OF TEETH. 
 
 MOVES. 
 
 ERROR ON ONE DIAM- 
 ETRAL PITCH GEAR. 
 
 TIMES AROUND. 
 
 174. 
 
 H-A 
 
 
 
 174.9964 
 
 i A + A 
 
 .0112 
 
 6 
 
 176.0024 
 
 lif + if 
 
 .0075 
 
 7 
 
 176.9991 
 
 2 if + & 
 
 '.0027 
 
 11 
 
 177.9995 
 
 3ff + B 
 
 .0014 
 
 17 
 
 179.0002 
 
 2| 7 if 
 
 .0006 
 
 11 
 
 180. 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 180.9996 
 
 2 A + if 
 
 .0012 
 
 11 
 
 182. 
 
 A + ?V 
 
 
 
 183.0003 
 
 1 2A _1_ 8 
 
 J-ft r^ ?7 
 
 .0009 
 
 8 
 
 184. 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 185. 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 186. 
 
 B-B 
 
 
 
 186.9982 
 
 m + if 
 
 .0056 
 
 8 
 
 188. 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 189.0015 
 
 2 ff if 
 
 .0046 
 
 11 
 
 190. 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 191.0015 
 
 iff + if 
 
 .0046 
 
 10 
 
 191.9983 
 
 m - if 
 
 .0055 
 
 11 
 
 193.0007 
 
 ITT if 
 
 .0021 
 
 4 
 
 193.9981 
 
 2|2 8 
 
 .0061 
 
 11 
 
 195. 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 196. 
 
 if 
 
 
 
 196.9996 
 
 m + if 
 
 .0013 
 
 11 
 
 198. 
 
 A + A 
 
 
 
 199.0005 
 
 2H-A 
 
 .0014 
 
 11 
 
 200. 
 
 f A 
 
 
 
 201.0003 
 
 
 .0011 
 
 13 
 
 201.9991 
 
 3ii + A 
 
 .0028 
 
 17 
 
 202.9979 
 
 iff + A 
 
 .0065 
 
 9 
 
 203.9992 
 
 
 .0025 
 
 13 
 
 205. 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 206.0007 
 
 2f f + A 
 
 .0023 
 
 15 
 
 206.9991 
 
 0^ 2| 
 
 .0029 
 
 14 
 
 207.9980 
 
 lif + if 
 
 .0063 
 
 9 
 
 208.9987 
 
 A + & 
 
 .0041 
 
 2 
 
 210. 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 211.0013 
 
 iff + if 
 
 .0039 
 
 11 
 
 211.9995 
 
 3X _j_ 6 
 
 .0017 
 
 17 
 
 212.9990 
 
 IB + 4\ 
 
 .0033 
 
 8 
 
 214.0003 
 
 
 .0010 
 
 15 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 Compound Index Movements on the Nos. 1, 2, 3 and 4, Design 
 
 1893, Universal Milling Machines. (Absolute and 
 
 Approximate.) 
 
 NO. OF TEETH. 
 
 MOVES. 
 
 ERROR ON ONE DIAM- 
 ETRAL PITCH. 
 
 TIMES AROUND. 
 
 215. 
 
 g 
 7 
 
 
 
 216. 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 217.0014 
 
 2 A + it 
 
 .0044 
 
 13 
 
 217.9986 
 
 iff -A 
 
 .0042 
 
 7 
 
 218.9989 
 
 3ft -B 
 
 .0034 
 
 19 
 
 220. 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 220.9996 
 
 1A-A 
 
 .0013 
 
 6 
 
 222.0019 
 
 2A-B 
 
 .0060 
 
 11 
 
 222.9998 
 
 2ft + if 
 
 .0005 
 
 16 
 
 223.9955 
 
 2 A + & 
 
 .0143 
 
 13 
 
 225. 
 
 A- A 
 
 
 
 225.9995 
 
 HI + it 
 
 .0014 
 
 13 
 
 226.9999 
 
 3A + A 
 
 .0005 
 
 18 
 
 228.0010 
 
 2A-H 
 
 .0032 
 
 11 
 
 229.0002 
 
 2H-H 
 
 .0007 
 
 12 
 
 230. 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 231. 
 
 A + A 
 
 
 
 232. 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 233.0007 
 
 iff + A 
 
 .0022 
 
 11 
 
 234.0022 
 
 2ft + A 
 
 .0068 
 
 17 
 
 235. 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 236.0007 
 
 2ft + A 
 
 .0021 
 
 17 
 
 236.9998 
 
 2#-A 
 
 .0006 
 
 13 
 
 237.9992 
 
 2A + M 
 
 .0024 
 
 15 
 
 238.9997 
 
 iff + if 
 
 .0008 
 
 11 
 
 240. 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 240.9997 
 
 iA + tt 
 
 .0010 
 
 9 
 
 241.9996 
 
 8ff-A 
 
 .0013 
 
 15 
 
 242.9997 
 
 iff -A 
 
 .0009 
 
 10 
 
 243.9986 
 
 2tt + it 
 
 .0044 
 
 17 
 
 245. 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 246.0012 
 
 i^-it 
 
 .0037 
 
 5 
 
 247.0002 
 
 2it-A 
 
 .0007 
 
 14 
 
 248. 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 249.0002 
 
 3A-A 
 
 .0005 
 
 19 
 
 250.0027 
 
 2A-A 
 
 .0083 
 
 13 
 
196 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 If the index head is set for a lower number than the 
 desired one, then the larger of the two moves must carry 
 the top of blank in the opposite direction from that in 
 which the cross-slide is moved, while if the index head is 
 set for a higher number than the desired one, then the 
 larger of the two moves must carry the top of blank in the 
 same direction as that in which the cross-slide is moved." 
 
 The foregoing tables were prepared with reference to 
 the No. i Universal Milling Machine, as this machine is 
 most frequently used for the operations requiring index- 
 ing mechanism. When, however, the movements involve 
 the use of the two outer circles of holes of the index plate, 
 the figures given can be applied to the No. 4 Universal 
 Milling Mnchine, the crank pin of this machine being 
 used, at such times, in the outer circle of holes, and the 
 back pin in the second circle. 
 
 The following table gives a number of movements of 
 the No. 4 machine by the compound method : 
 
 Compound Index Movements on the No. 4 Universal 
 Milling Machine. 
 
 NO. OP DIVISIONS. 
 
 MOVES. 
 
 
 NO. OP DIVISIONS. 
 
 MOVES. 
 
 57 
 
 T JT "T" T'U 
 
 
 217 
 
 H-tt 
 
 93 
 
 T ~f~ A 
 
 
 228 
 
 ft-A 
 
 114 
 
 if A 
 
 
 282 
 
 if ?V 
 
 141 
 
 ft -If 
 
 
 285 
 
 If -if 
 
 171 
 
 T 8 7 T 4 ? 
 
 
 304 
 
 A~A 
 
 186 
 
 it-tf 
 
 
 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 I 97 
 
 The following table is the result of Mr. Schneider's 
 ingenious suggestion, that sometimes it is not necessary to 
 use the compound indexing for obtaining each division 
 of the work, but that it is often sufficient to use the 
 method once in going around the work twice or twice in 
 going around three times, etc. For example : 96 divis- 
 ions may be obtained by indexing for 48 and going com- 
 pletely around the work in the ordinary way, then dividing 
 one of the spaces in equal parts, or obtaining one of 
 the desired 96 divisions by the compound method (-f^ -[- 
 ^), and finally by again going around the work, indexing 
 as at first for 48 divisions : 
 
 Compound Index Movements for Nos. 1, 2, 3 and 4, Design 
 1893, Universal Milling Machines (Schneider's Method.) 
 
 DUMBER OF 
 TEETH. 
 
 SET FOR 
 
 TIMES 
 AROUND. 
 
 ORDINARY 
 MOVES. 
 
 COMPOUND 
 MOVES. 
 
 NUMBEROF 
 COMPOUND 
 MOVES. 
 
 69 
 
 23 
 
 3 
 
 IB 
 
 |1_11 
 
 2 
 
 87 
 
 29 
 
 3 
 
 Hi 
 
 B-H 
 
 2 
 
 91 
 
 13 
 
 *7 
 
 3 7 3 9 
 
 A + if 
 
 6 
 
 93 
 
 31 
 
 
 
 iA 
 
 A + H 
 
 2 
 
 96 
 
 48 
 
 2 
 
 if 
 
 T 3 8 + A 
 
 1 
 
 138 
 
 46 
 
 3 
 
 If 
 
 H-A 
 
 2 
 
 174 
 
 58 
 
 3 
 
 ft 
 
 H-A 
 
 2 
 
 182 
 
 26 
 
 7 
 
 IB 
 
 A + ?V 
 
 6 
 
 186 
 
 62 
 
 3 
 
 ff 
 
 if H 
 
 2 
 
 225 
 
 45 
 
 5 
 
 If 
 
 A - A 
 
 4 
 
 231 
 
 21 
 
 11 
 
 itt 
 
 ^ + A 
 
 10 
 
 253 
 
 23 
 
 11 
 
 IB 
 
 B-B 
 
 10 
 
 259 
 
 37 
 
 7 
 
 iA 
 
 H-A 
 
 6 
 
 272 
 
 136 
 
 2 
 
 A 
 
 ift T7 
 
 1 
 
 273 
 
 39 
 
 7 
 
 !A 
 
 B.-B 
 
 6 
 
 276 
 
 92 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 H 
 
 H-H 
 
 2 
 
 287 
 
 41 
 
 1 
 
 If 
 
 if - * 6 r 
 
 6 
 
 288 
 
 144 
 
 2 
 
 A 
 
 A A 
 
 1 
 
 301 
 
 43 
 
 7 
 
 ff 
 
 if -if 
 
 6 
 
 304 
 
 152 
 
 2 
 
 A 
 
 i& A 
 
 1 
 
198 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 Adjustable j n hj s articles upon compounding indexing, Mr. Fred. 
 J. Miller has shown how much the usefulness of an index 
 plate is increased if the back pin of the mechanism is 
 made adjustable, the same as the front pin, and Mr. Miller 
 holds a patent on Index Centres, of which we hold a 
 shop right, which is important in this connection. When 
 such an adjustment is applied to our machines, the 
 number of the attainable movements is increased. The 
 following table is indicative of this : 
 
 COMPOUND INDEX MOVEMENTS. 
 
 Extra Divisions Obtained by Making the Back Pin Adjust- 
 able on Universal Milling Machines. 
 
 NO. OF DIVISIONS. 
 
 MOVES. 
 
 
 NO. OP DIVISIONS. 
 
 MOVES. 
 
 51 
 
 iV + if 
 
 
 204 
 
 A-A 
 
 57 
 
 T 6 8+lV 
 
 
 207 
 
 A-A 
 
 63 
 
 H + 1 3 7 
 
 
 217 
 
 tt-H 
 
 102 
 
 A + A 
 
 
 222 
 
 H-H 
 
 111 
 
 A + U 
 
 
 228 
 
 A -A 
 
 114 
 
 il-T% 
 
 
 246 
 
 H-ft 
 
 123 
 
 It -if 
 
 
 252 
 
 A + A 
 
 126 
 
 A+A 
 
 
 255 
 
 A- A 
 
 129 
 
 tt-A 
 
 
 258 
 
 II -If 
 
 141 
 
 - 
 
 
 261 
 
 A-A 
 
 153 
 
 tt-A 
 
 
 279 
 
 1 3 T + A 
 
 161 
 
 A 5 3 r 
 
 
 282 
 
 H-A 
 
 171 
 
 A-A 
 
 
 285 
 
 A-A 
 
 189 
 
 A-A 
 
 
 306 
 
 A-A 
 
 192 
 
 A-f A 
 
 
 
 
 Mr. Miller has given a great deal of attention to the 
 results obtained by the use of two adjustable pins in con- 
 nection with an index plate, and his tables are interesting 
 and, in many instances, would be of great value. We do 
 not reproduce them, however, as none happen to be appli- 
 cable to the index plates regularly furnished with the 
 machines. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 '99 
 
 ill 
 
 BEVEL GEARS. 
 
200 BROWN & SHARPE MFG, CO. 
 
 CUTTING BEVEL GEARS IN 4 UNIVERSAL MILLING 
 MACHINE. 
 
 An article written by Mr. O. J. Beale appeared in the 
 American Machinist, June 20, 189 5, with the above title and 
 covers this subject most thoroughly. The following is a 
 reprint of this article, together with the illustrations : 
 
 " Bevel gears connect shafts whose axes meet when suffi- 
 ciently prolonged. The teeth of bevel gears are formed 
 about the f rustrums of cones whose apexes are at the same 
 point where the shafts meet. In Fig. 63 we have the axes 
 A O and B O, meeting at O, and the apexes of the two 
 cones are also at O. If, in any bevel gear, the teeth were 
 sufficiently prolonged toward the apex, they would become 
 infinitely small ; that is, the teeth would all end in a point, 
 or vanish at O. We can also consider a bevel gear as 
 beginning at the apex and becoming larger and larger as 
 we go away from the apex. 
 
 " Fig. 64 is a section of a pair of bevel gears, the gear C 
 D being twice as large as C I. The outer surface of a 
 tooth, J E, Fig. 64, is called its face. The distance C c 
 is called the length of the face of tooth, which is often 
 designated by the letter F ; strictly, the distance J E is 
 longer than C c, but the difference is not usually recog- 
 nized. The outer part of a tooth at C is called its large 
 end and the inner part C the small end. In speaking of 
 the pitch of bevel gears we always name that at the large 
 end or at the large pitch circle, thus the pitch of a bevel 
 gear, at its large pitch circle, corresponds to that of a spur 
 gear. The sizes of the teeth at the small end are in the 
 same proportion to those at the large end as the distance 
 O C is to the apex distance O C, that is, we can figure the 
 sizes as we would figure the thickness of a wedge at any 
 point, after we know the length and the thickness at the 
 
BROWN A SHARPE MFG. .CO. 2OI 
 
 butt end. There are convenient tables for spur gear teeth 
 in Brown & Sharpe's * Practical Treatise on Gearing.' 
 
 " Nothing is gained by having the length of face J E 
 longer than five times the tooth thickness at the large pitch 
 circle, and even this is too long when it is more than a 
 third of the apex distance C O. To cut a bevel gear with 
 a rotary cutter, as in Fig. 65, is at best but a compromise, 
 because the teeth change pitch from end to end, so that 
 the cutter, being of the right shape for the large ends of 
 the teeth, cannot be right for the small ends, and the vari- 
 ation is too great when the length of face is longer than a 
 third of the apex distance. Frequently the teeth have to be 
 be rounded over at the small ends by filing ; the longer 
 the face the more we have to file. 
 
 " The data for bevel gears can be figured by trigonome- 
 try, and without a drawing, as in Brown & Sharpe's ' For- 
 mulas in Gearing ; ' they can also be obtained by the help 
 of measurement of a drawing. We will suppose that we 
 have a drawing, and that we have the gear blanks turned 
 correctly enough to gauge from in making our settings for 
 cutting the teeth. It is possible to cut a good gear from a 
 blank somewhat incorrectly turned, but it is quite incon- 
 venient to make the settings without guiding by the 
 blank. 
 
 " These data are needed before beginning to cut : 
 
 " The pitch and the number of teeth, the same as for 
 spur gears. 
 
 "The number of the cutter, so as to select one of correct 
 form, Brown & Sharpe have a system of eight cutters for 
 each pitch. A pair of bevel gears having different num- 
 bers of teeth may require two cutters. 
 
 "The whole depth of the tooth spaces both at the outer 
 and inner ends, which can be designated by D" -j- f at the 
 outer end, and by D'" -(-f at the inner end. 
 
 " The thickness of the teeth at the outer and inner pitch 
 lines, which we will designate by t at the outer, and by t' 
 at the inner end. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 " The heights of the teeth above the two pitch lines, s at 
 the outer end and s' at the inner. 
 
 " The cutting angles, or the angles that the path of the 
 cutter makes with the axes of the gears. In Fig. 64 the 
 cutting angle for the gear C D is A O G, and the cutting 
 angle for the pinion is B O H. In Fig. 66 a cutter is shown 
 passing through a tooth space along the line O G, the 
 gear being set to the cutting angle A O G. 
 
 "The lines GO and H O. Fig. 64, are called working 
 depth lines, because they show the depth that the teeth of 
 the two gears engage. The spaces are cut deeper than 
 these lines an amount which is called the clearance or f ; 
 this f or clearance is the same at both ends of the teeth, 
 when cut with a rotary cutter. 
 
 " Brown & Sharpe have kindly offered to turn up a pair 
 of blanks and cut them, while I note down the machine 
 settings. I choose gears of 8 pitch, 24 and 12 teeth, ^ 
 inch face, shown in Figs. 64 and 72. 
 
 " The shape of the teeth of one of these gears differs so 
 much from that in the other gear that two cutters are 
 required. The cutters may be determined as follows : 
 Twice the length of the line C K (Fig. 64) in inches, per- 
 pendicular to C O, multiplied by the diametrial pitch, 
 equals the number of teeth for which to select a cutter, as 
 to form, to cut the twelve-tooth gear. This number is 
 about 13, indicating a No. 8 cutter. In the same way, 
 multiplying twice the corresponding line in the other gear 
 by the diametrial pitch, we have about 54, calling for a 
 No. 3 cutter. C K is sometimes called the back cone 
 radius. 
 
 " This way of selecting cutters is based upon the idea of 
 shaping the teeth as near right at the large end as practi- 
 cable, and then to file the small ends where the cutter has 
 not rounded them over enough. In Fig. 69 the tooth L 
 has been cut to thickness at both pitch lines, but it must 
 still be rounded at the inner end, or at the part corres- 
 ponding to J in Fig. 64. The teeth M M, Fig. 69, have 
 been filed. In thus rounding the teeth we must avoid 
 making them any thinner at the pitch line. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 20 3 
 
 Fig. 67. 
 
 Fig. 66. 
 
204 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 " In cutting a bevel gear the finished spaces are not 
 always of the same form as the cutter might be expected 
 to make, because of the changes in the position of the 
 gear blank in order to cut the two sides of the spaces. 
 The cutter, of course, being thin enough for the small end 
 of a space, the large end of a space is cut to the required 
 width by rotating the blank and adjusting sidewise, and 
 we usually cut twice through each space. Thus in Fig. 65 
 a gear is in position to have a space widened at the large 
 end e, and the last chip to be taken off the tooth on the 
 right of the cutter, the blank having been moved to the 
 right and then rotated in the direction of the arrow. It 
 may be well to remerrrber that in setting to finish the side 
 of a tooth the gear blank is moved sidewise in the direc- 
 tion to take this tooth away from the cutter, and then the 
 blank is rotated by indexing the spindle to bring the tooth 
 up against the cutter. Now this tends not only to cut the 
 space wider at the largest pitch circle, but also to cut 
 still more off at the face of the tooth ; that is, the teeth 
 may be cut rather thin at the ,f ace, and left rather thick at 
 the roots. This tendency is'greater as a cutting angle B 
 O H, Fig. 64, is smaller or as a bevel gear is more like a 
 spur gear, because when the cutting angle is small the 
 blank must be rotated through a greater arc in order to 
 set to cut the right tooth thickness at the outer pitch cir- 
 cle. This can be understood by Figs. 67 and 70 ; in Fig. 
 67 the teeth are cut square across the axis, and the rota- 
 tion of the blank in order to cut spaces wider at the out- 
 side has not narrowed the faces of the teeth any more 
 than the roots. The different positions of the cutter in both 
 the unfinished and finished spaces is shown by the dotted 
 lines. Now as the cutting angle of a bevel gear approaches 
 a right angle, as in Fig. 67, we find- less and less tendency 
 to cut the tooth faces too narrow. In Fig. 70 a cutter is 
 passing through a space in a spur gear, which has no 
 cutting angle ; it is clear that any rotation of this blank 
 tends directly to change the shape of the teeth as regards 
 the thickness of the face and the root. In this particular 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 20 5 
 
 gun n 
 
 u>Kl444iiy i M 1 1 1 ji 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1| 
 
 jESan IU|b~ 
 
 Fig. 68. 
 
 Fiff. 75. 
 
 Fig. 74. 
 
 fig. 72. 
 
206 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 setting, shown by the centre lines of the cutter and of the 
 gear, the roots are not changed while the faces are made 
 considerably thinner, as indicated by the dotted lines. 
 This change in the shape of tht spaces caused by the ro- 
 tation of the blank may be so great as to require the sub- 
 stitution of a cutter that is narrower at e e', Fig. 65, that is, 
 a cutter for cutting a higher-numbered gear. In using 
 the cutter for a higher-numbere'd gear the radius of 
 curvature of the tooth sides is lengthened, but the longer 
 tooth curves are not so objectionable as the thin tooth 
 faces. 
 
 "In the order for cutting the gears, Fig. 72, the foreman 
 of the gear department calls for a No. 6 cutter for 1 7 to 
 20 teeth to cut the i2-tooth gear, instead of a No. 8, 
 as I have just figured. This is a little surprising, but it is 
 still more surprising to be told by the foreman of the cut- 
 ter department that he would fill an order for a cutter to 
 cut this same gear by sending a No. 8 for 12 to 13 teeth. 
 I told him about the gear order, and he replied, * I don't 
 know what they do over there, but I should think they 
 work by guess. I make cutters according to the rule in 
 the catalogue. If there is a better rule I should like to 
 have it. We seldom or never have any fault found with 
 bevel gear cutters because they round the teeth over too 
 much, but we have had complaints because the teeth are 
 not rounded enough.' 
 
 " From this it might be supposed that Brown & Sharpe 
 would use one thing on their own work, and send their 
 customer another, but such a supposition would not be 
 * fully warranted. As I have said, the cutting of a bevel 
 gear with a rotary cutter, as in Fig. 65, is a compromise. 
 The necessity for a compromise is evident when we con- 
 sider that an 8-pitch gear at one end may run down to 12 
 pitch at the other. 
 
 " Different workmen prefer to compromise in- different 
 ways. A workman can avoid much filing of the teeth by 
 the use of the No. 8 cutter, but the tooth faces will be con- 
 siderably too thin at the large ends. He can also avoid 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 some filing by an extra cut upon each side of the teeth at 
 the small ends, making four cuts in all. I have known 
 this compromise with a coarse pitch and long face. If the 
 faces are short and the pitch is fine he can sink the cutter 
 below the regular depth at the outside, and cut only once 
 around ; this compromise is little liked, and is seldom 
 employed ; it may require a special form and thickness of 
 cutter. The best compromise is to cut twice around, shap- 
 ing the teeth as nearly correct as practicable at the large 
 ends, and then file the small ends in low-numbered gears, 
 or those of fewer than twenty teeth. A workman can soon 
 acquire the skill to file the teeth almost as perfect as they 
 can be planed from a template. Still most workmen pre- 
 fer not to file the i2-tooth gear, Fig. 64, which is the rea- 
 son why the rule in the catalogue is followed in filling an 
 order for a gear cutter. 
 
 " In the selection of a cutter, the foreman of the cutting 
 department tells me that he cannot give a definite rule, and 
 that he is open to the criticism of guessing. If a pinion of 
 only 12 teeth is to run with a gear two or more times as 
 large, he takes a cutter shaped for 17 to 20 teeth, instead 
 of the usual 12 to 13 teeth. For any gears higher than 
 25 teeth he would adhere to the rule, and take the cutter 
 indicated by the length of the line C K, Fig. 64. If he 
 has many gears of the same size, he cuts one pair and 
 files them to run together, in order to decide definitely as 
 to the cutters. 
 
 " The sizes of the tooth parts at the large end are copied 
 right from a table of spur gear teeth. The distance O c, 
 Fig. 64, is seven-tenths the apex distance O C, so that the 
 sizes of the tooth parts at the small end, all except f, or 
 the clearance, are seven-tenths the large. The order goes 
 to the workman in this form, P standing for diametral 
 pitch, and N for the number of teeth : 
 
 ^ 5 ; 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
 ^CALIFORNVN 
 
208 
 
 BROWN A SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 FIG. 73. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 209 
 
 LARGE GEAR. 
 P = 8 
 
 N = 24 
 
 D" + f = .270" D'" + f= .195" 
 t = .196" t' = .137" 
 
 s = .I2 5 " S' = .087'' 
 
 Cutting angle =59 10'. 
 
 SMALL GEAR. 
 
 N = 12. 
 
 Cutting angle = 22 18'. 
 Cutters, Nos. 3 and 6, 8 P, bevel. 
 
 " Before beginning to cut, the bed S, Fig. 73, is set to 
 zero. The dial pointer of the cross feed screw T is set 
 and noted, so that we can adjust the blank to any required 
 distance out of centre with the cutter. The spiral head 
 N is moved up to the cutting angle, which for our 24-tooth 
 gear is 59 ic/; we guess at the -J- degree more than 59 
 degrees. 
 
 " Mark the depth of cut at the outside as in Fig. 74. It 
 is also well enough to mark the depth at the inside, as a 
 check. The thickness of the teeth at the outside is con- 
 veniently determined by the solid gauge, Fig. 75. The 
 vernier caliper, Fig. 68, will measure different sizes. If 
 we do not have the vernier caliper, a gauge like Fig. 75, 
 filed to the thickness at the small ends, will answer. 
 
 " The index having been set to divide to the right num- 
 ber, our workman cuts two spaces central with the blank, 
 leaving a tooth between that is a little too thick, as in the 
 upper part of Fig. 69. The tooth has to be cut away more 
 in proportion from the large than from the small end, 
 which is the reason for setting the blank out of centre, as 
 in Fig. 65. 
 
 " It is important to remember that the part of the cutter 
 that is finishing one side of a tooth at the pitch line 
 should be central with the gear blank, in order to know at 
 once in which direction to set the blank out of centre. 
 
2IO BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 We cannot readily tell how much out of centre to set the 
 blank until we have cut and tried, because the same part 
 of a cutter does not cut to the pitch line at both ends of 
 the tooth. As a trial distance out of centre, we can take 
 about one-tenth to one-eighth of the thickness of the 
 teeth at the large end. The actual distance out of centre 
 for the i2-tooth gear is .021 inch, and for the 24-tooth 
 .030 inch, when using the cutters. listed in the catalogue. 
 
 "After a little practice a workman can set his blank the 
 trial distance out of centre, and take his first cuts, without 
 making any central cuts at all, but it is safer to take cen- 
 tral cuts like the upper ones in Fig. 69. The depth of the 
 cuts is controlled by the shaft U, Fig. 73. Now, by 
 means of the screw T, set out of centre the trial distance, 
 which can be one-tenth the thickness of the tooth at the 
 large end in a i2-tooth gear, and from that to one-eighth 
 the thickness in a 24-tooth gear and larger. The direc- 
 tion out of centre is indicated in Fig. 65, which is to move 
 the tooth away from the cutter, by turning the cross-feed 
 screw T, Fig. 73 ; the tooth is then rotated up against the 
 cutter in the direction of the arrow, Fig. 65, by turning 
 the index crank R, Fig. 73, just enough to trim the side 
 of the tooth as shown in Fig. 65. The blank is now set 
 the same distance out of centre in the other direction, 
 rotated contrary to the arrow, Fig. 65, and the other side 
 of the tooth is trimmed until one end is nearly down to the 
 right thickness. If now the thickness of the small end is 
 in the same proportion to the large end as O c is to O C 
 in Fig. 64, we can at once trim the tooth to the right 
 thickness by turning the index crank R, Fig. 73. The 
 object of setting out of centre is to trim more from the 
 large end e', Fig. 65 ; if now we find that by our two set- 
 tings the tooth is still going to be too thick at e', when the 
 small end is right, the out of centre distance must be 
 increased. 
 
 "An easy way to remember this principle is this : Too 
 much out of centre leaves the small end of the tooth too 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 211 
 
 thick, while too little out of centre leaves the small end too 
 thin. 
 
 "After the proper distance out of centre has been learned, 
 the teeth can be finish-cut by going around out of centre, 
 first on one side, and then on the other, without cutting any 
 central spaces at all. If, however, a gear is coarser than 5- 
 pitch diametral, it is sometimes well enough to cut all the 
 spaces central at first. 
 
 " Blanks are not always turned nearly enough alike to be 
 cut without a different setting of the machine for different 
 blanks. If the hubs vary in length, the height of the knee 
 Q, Fig. 73, has to be varied. In thus varying, the same 
 depth of cut or the exact D" -f- f may not always be 
 reached. A slight difference in the depth is not so 
 objectionable as the incorrect tooth thickness that it may 
 cause, hence it is well, after cutting once around and finish- 
 ing one side of the teeth, to adjust the spindle N, by 
 means of the index crank R, until the right tooth thick- 
 ness is obtained, paying more attention to the tooth thick- 
 ness than to the number of index spaces covered by the 
 crank. Of course, if the blanks are alike, it is easier to 
 count the index spaces in passing from one side of the 
 tooth to the other. 
 
 "After a gear is cut and before it is filed it is sometimes 
 not a very satisfactory looking piece of work. In Fig. 69 
 the tooth L is as the cutter left it, and is ready to be filed 
 to the shape of the teeth M M." 
 
212 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 DSE OF MILLING MACHINES. 
 
 CUTTING SPIRALS WITH UNIVERSAL MILLING 
 MACHINES. 
 
 of cSng" The ind exing head stock or spiral head, as indicated in 
 Gears, connection with the descriptions of the Univeral Milling 
 Machines, is used for cutting spirals, the flutes of twist 
 drills, for example, as well as for indexing or dividing. A 
 positive rotary movement is given to the work while the 
 spiral bed is being moved lengthways by the feed 
 screw, and the velocity ratios of these movements are 
 regulated by four change gears, shown in position in Fig. 
 5, and known as the gear on worm or worm gear, first 
 gear on stud, the first gear put on stud, second gear on 
 stud and gear on screw or screw gear. The screw gear 
 and first gear on stud are the drivers and the others the 
 driven gears. Usually these gears are of such ratio that 
 the work is advanced more than an inch while making one 
 turn and thus the spirals, cut on Milling Machines, are 
 designated in terms of inches to one turn, rather than 
 turns, or threads per inch ; for instance a spiral is said to 
 be of 8 inches lead, not that its pitch is y& turn per inch. 
 The feed screw of the spiral bed has four threads to the 
 inch, and forty turns of the worm make one turn of the 
 spiral head spindle ; accordingly, if change gears of equal 
 diameter are used, the work will make a complete turn 
 while it is moved lengthways 10 inches; that is the spiral 
 will have a lead of i o inches. But this lead is practically 
 the lead of the machine, as it is the resultant of the action 
 of the parts of the machine that are always employed in 
 this work, and is so regarded in making the calculations 
 used in cutting spirals. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 213 
 
 In principle, these calculations are the same as for 
 change gears of a Screw Cutting Lathe. The compound G ^jj. n ff a 
 ratio of the driven to the driving gears equals in all cases, Lathe. 
 the ratio of the lead of the required spiral to the lead of 
 the machine. And this can be readily understood by 
 changing the diameters of the gears. 
 
 Gears of the same diameter produce, as explained 
 above, a spiral with a lead of 10 inches, which is the 
 same lead as the lead of the machine. Three gears of 
 equal diameter and a driven gear double this diameter 
 produce a spiral with a lead of 20 inches, or twice the lead 
 of the machine and with both driven gears twice the 
 diameters of the drivers, the ratio being compound, a 
 spiral is produced with a lead of 40 inches or four times 
 the machine's lead. Conversely, driving gears twice the 
 diameter of the driven, produce a spiral with a lead equal 
 to l /i the lead of the machine or 2^ inches. 
 
 Expressing the ratios as fractions, Driven Gear3 = 
 
 Driving Gears 
 
 Lead of Required spimi or as t ^ e product of each class of gears 
 
 Lead of Machine 
 
 determines the ratio, the head being double geared, and as 
 the lead of the machine is ten inches ^!5L?L?. rt J.??_ G ^!? = 
 
 Product of Driving Gears 
 Lead of Required Spiral That ^ the compoun d ratio Of the 
 
 Driven to the Driving Gears may always be represented 
 by a fraction whose numerator is the lead to be cut and 
 whose denominator is ten. Or, in other words, the ratio 
 is as the required lead is to 10, that is, if the required 
 lead is 20 the ratio is 20 : 10, or to express this in units 
 instead of tens, the ratio is always the same as one tenth 
 of the required lead is to one. And frequently this is a 
 very convenient way to think of the ratio ; for example, if 
 the ratio of the lead is 40, the gears are 4:1, If the 
 lead is 25, the gears are 2.5 : i, etc. 
 
 To illustrate the usual calculations, assume as in Fig. 
 5 that a spiral of 12 inch lead is to be cut. The com- 
 pound ratio of the driven to the driving gears equals the 
 desired lead divided by 10, or it may be represented by 
 the fraction ^f . Resolving this into two factors to repre- 
 
214 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 sent the two pairs of change gears, fj = f x 4. Both 
 terms of the first factor are multiplied by such a number 
 (24 in this instance) that the resulting numerator arid 
 denominator will correspond with the number of teeth of 
 two of the change gears furnished with the machine, (such 
 multiplications not affecting the value of a fraction) 
 f x ff = J- The second factor is similarly treated 
 -| x |= |~|, and the gears with 72 and 32 and 48 and 40 
 teeth are selected, -- = (-|^-|- ). The first two are the 
 driven, and the last two the drivers, the numerators of the 
 fractions having represented the driven gears, and the 72 is 
 placed as the worm gear, the 40 as the first on stud, 32 the 
 second on stud and 48 as the screw gear. The two driving 
 gears might be transposed and the two driven gears might 
 also be transposed without changing the spiral. That is, the 
 72 could be used as the second on stud and the 32 as the 
 worm gear, if such an arrangement was more convenient. 
 
 From what has been said, the rules are plain : 
 Rules for Note the ratio of the required lead to ten. This ratio 
 
 obtaining _ . 
 
 Ratio of is the compound ratio of the driven to the driving gears. 
 necessary Example: if the lead of required spiral is 12 inches, 12 to 
 
 to Cut a 
 
 Given 10 will be the ratio of the gears. 
 
 Spiral. 
 
 Or, divide the required lead by 10 and note the ratio 
 between the quotient and i. This ratio is usually the most 
 simple form of the compound ratio of the driven to the 
 driving gears. Example : if the required lead is 40 inches, 
 the quotient 40-1-10 is 4 and the ratio 4 to i. 
 Rule for Having obtained the ratio between the required lead 
 
 Determin- . . 
 
 ing Num. and ten by one of the preceding rules, express the ratio m 
 Teeth of the form of a fraction ; resolve this fraction into two fac- 
 
 tors, raise these factors to higher terms that correspond 
 
 Cut a Given . . , , 
 
 Spiral, with the teeth of gears that can be conveniently used. The 
 numerators will represent the driven and the denomina- 
 tors, the driving gears that produce the required spiral. 
 For example, what gears shall be used to cut a lead of 27 
 inches ? 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 215 
 
 From the fact that the product of the driven gears 
 divided by the product of the drivers equals the lead 
 divided by ten, or one-tenth of the lead, it is evident that 
 ten times the product of the driven gears divided by the 
 product of the drivers will equal the lead of the spiral. 
 Hence the rule : 
 
 Divide ten times the product of the driven gears by the Rule for 
 
 Ascertain- 
 
 product of the drivers and the quotient is the lead of the ing what 
 resulting spiral in inches to one turn. For example, 
 what spiral will be cut by gears, with 48, 72, 32 and 40 
 teeth, the first two being used as driven gears ? Spiral to 
 be cut equals 10 ' 48 * 72 =27 inches to one turn. 
 
 32 x 40 
 
 This rule is often of service in determining what spirals 
 may be cut with the gears the workman chances to have 
 at hand. 
 
 The tables on pages 218 to 221 give the leads of spirals 
 produced by the gears furnished with the machines. 
 
 The chapter on " Continued Fractions " in our Practi- 
 cal Treatise on Gearing is of assistance in selecting gears 
 for fractional spirals. 
 
 The change gears having been selected, the next step 
 in cutting spirals is to determine the position at which the 
 spiral bed must be placed to bring the spiral in line with Spirals. 
 the cutter as the work is being milled, for, if the spiral is 
 not in line with the cutter the groove will not be cut to the 
 shape of the cutter. 
 
 The correct position of the spiral bed is indicated by the 
 angle shown at A, Fig. 77, and this angle, as may be 
 noted from that figure, has the same number of degrees 
 as the angle B, which is termed the angle of the spiral, 
 and is formed by the intersection of the spiral and a line 
 parallel with the axis of the piece being milled. The 
 reason the angles A and B are alike is that their cor- 
 responding sides are perpendicular to each other. 
 
 The angle of the spiral depends upon the lead of the 
 spiral and the diameter of the piece to be milled. The 
 greater the lead of a spiral of any given diameter, the 
 
2l6 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 smaller the angle, and the greater the diameter of any 
 spiral the greater the spiral angle. 
 
 The angle may be ascertained in two ways, graphically, 
 or more conveniently by a simple calculation and refer- 
 ence to the accompanying tables. In determining it graph- 
 ically, a right angle triangle is drawn to scale. One of the 
 sides which forms the right angle represents the lead of 
 the spiral in inches ; the other side represents the circum- 
 ference of the piece in inches, and the hypothenuse repre- 
 sents the line of the spiral. The angle between the lines 
 representing the line of the spiral and the lead of the spi- 
 ral is the angle of the spiral. This angle can be trans- 
 ferred from the drawing to the work by a bevel protrac- 
 tor, or even by cutting a paper templet and winding it 
 about the work as shown in Fig. 78. The machine is 
 then set so that the spiral or groove as it touches the cut- 
 ter will be in line with the cutter. Or the angle may be 
 measured and the spiral bed set to a corresponding num- 
 ber of degrees by the graduations on the clamp bed. 
 
 The natural tangent of the angle of the spiral is the 
 quotient of the circumference of the piece divided by the 
 lead of the spiral. Accordingly, the second method 
 of obtaining the angle of the spiral is to divide the cir- 
 cumference of the piece by the lead, and note the num- 
 ber of degrees opposite the figures that correspond with 
 the quotient in the accompanying tables of natural tan- 
 gents, pages 222 and 223. The angle having been thus 
 obtained, the spiral bed is set by the graduations on the 
 clamp bed. 
 
 Tables, pages 218 to 221, give the lead of spirals pro- 
 duced by the various combinations of the change gears 
 furnished with the machine and the angles of these spirals 
 for diameters from ^ inch to 4 inches. 
 Use of Before a spiral is cut, it is well to let the mill iust touch 
 
 Machines 
 
 in Cutting the work, then run the work along by hand and make a 
 slight spiral mark, and by this mark see whether the 
 change gears give the right lead. The saddle can then 
 be set to the proper angle. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 217 
 
 FIG. 77. 
 
 FIG. 78. 
 
218 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 CO 
 
 LJ 
 
 O 
 2 
 
 CO 
 
 < 
 
 oc 
 
 CL 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 oc 
 
 o 
 
 < 
 
 X 
 
 o 
 
 Lu 
 O 
 
 - 
 J 
 CO 
 
 To FIND THE ANGLE OF SPIRAL, DIVIDE THE CIRCUMFERENCE UY THE PITCH OR LEAD, AND THE 
 QUOTIENT WILL IJE THE TANGENT OF THE ANGLE." THEN FIND THE ANGLE IN A TABLE 
 OF TANGENTS. FOR COMPLETE EXPLANATION SEE PRACTICAL 
 TREATISE ON GEARING. 
 
 DIAMETER OF THE BLANK, OR SPIRAL, TO IJE CUT. 
 
 5* 
 
 
 ANGLE FOR SETTING THE SADDLE. 
 
 CO 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 k 
 
 
 k 
 
 
 If 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 IN- 
 
 rH 
 
 
 S' 
 
 
 rH 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 v^ 
 
 "^w 1 
 
 k 
 
 %%% 
 
 k 
 
 1C 00 i-l 00 W5 jj 
 
 k 
 
 co o t- xo cq o oo 
 
 "H^ CO CO CO CO C^ Cl 
 
 k 
 
 "Ifsl^ffisl 
 
 k 
 
 f^H^fiffssss 
 
 k 
 
 "o'cC! C0*<35 50 3?S* < ^rH*O t Oi < 00 4 00 ff 
 
 uinj auo o; saqoni m TP^LJ 
 
 5gSS^SSSoSS 
 
 
 A^aiog no .1139*) 
 
 rH rH rH rH r-< rH 
 
 prvjg no .rea*) pnooag 
 
 ^HOOG^OXXCCXMOOOXOOOOCO 
 <M<MCO'^'^(MiOCO(M^<M^C ; llO 
 
 pms no jBao isiij; 
 
 xooooGoSSJoosoSJcoSSxoS 
 
 miO AA UO JUB9f\ 
 
 ^l^^l^l^l^l^l^^^l^q^l^^ 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 219 
 
 1? 
 
 00 
 
 o 
 
 (M 
 
 CO i-l 
 
 Tt< T^ ^ 
 
 CO CO 00 b- 
 
 co co 
 
 CO CO CO CO 
 
 
 ^HCS 
 
 
 
 C^OOt-t^aDCOUO^^COG^rH 
 
 
 
 com 
 OCOCM 
 
 O C5 t~ 
 
 tun; 
 9uo 0} SPROUT TIT 
 
 00 t*- C5 rH G^ CO ^O CO 
 
 AV9JOg UO J139Q I 
 
 pnis no a^ao isai^ 
 
 COXOOC^O 
 
 OOOOOQOQOGOGOG^OOO 
 
220 
 
 BROWN & 8HARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 AND ANGLES 
 
 < 
 
 DC 
 
 EL 
 co 
 
 CO 
 DC 
 < 
 
 UJ 
 O 
 
 UJ 
 O 
 2 
 < 
 
 I 
 O 
 
 bu 
 
 O 
 
 u 
 
 J 
 
 CQ 
 < 
 
 
 '/I 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 ar 
 
 tun} 
 ano 03 saqoui ui qo^jt d 
 
 COCOC^CiCiXCDCOCO 
 TJH ^ ^ CO CO CO CO CO CO 
 
 CO CO CO CO CO CO 
 
 O5QOiOOiOCO5 i IO 
 
 CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO 
 
 -^ 
 
 CO 
 
 CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO 
 
 r-fcM^ -4* 00(^4* 
 
 
 COi Ir- IrHOOOS 
 
 rHOOOOOOOiaiGOQOOOt-t-t-COCOCO 
 
 H^MHiH^HeoH-t-f^ HCJ 
 
 H<N w(^Ki^Hc<HTCH^Kl-* 
 
 
 ping no Jtjao pnooag 
 
 'ttUOA\. UO J'BSJ) I 
 
 00 
 
 CO ^ 
 
 CO 
 
 *O 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 221 
 
 cewi 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 cc 
 
 CO 
 
 I*. 
 
 
 
 CO CO (M IH i-l O O OO t- t- CO ^5 
 
 T itHi li IrHr- IrHT-H 
 
 col-* 
 
 CC 
 
 co|-* 
 
 auo oj saqoni ui najij; 
 
 O CO O 
 O Tt< O 
 
 t- t- 
 
222 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 NATUBAL TANGENT. 
 
 !>eg. 
 
 <y 
 
 10' 
 
 20' 
 
 30' 
 
 40' 
 
 w 
 
 60' 
 
 
 
 
 .00000 
 
 .00290 
 
 .00581 
 
 .00872 
 
 .011(53 
 
 .01454 
 
 .01745 
 
 89 
 
 1 
 
 .01745 
 
 .02036 
 
 .02327 
 
 .02618 
 
 .02909 
 
 .03200 
 
 .03492 
 
 88 
 
 2 
 
 .03492 
 
 .03783 
 
 .04074 
 
 .04366 
 
 .04657 
 
 .04949 
 
 .05240 
 
 87 
 
 3 
 
 .05240 
 
 .05532 
 
 .05824 
 
 .06116 
 
 .06408 
 
 .06700 
 
 .06992 
 
 86 
 
 4 
 
 .06992 
 
 .07285 
 
 .07577 
 
 .07870 
 
 .08162 
 
 .08455 
 
 .08748 
 
 85 
 
 5 
 
 .08748 
 
 .09042 
 
 .09335 
 
 .09628 
 
 .09922 
 
 .10216 
 
 .10510 
 
 84 
 
 6 
 
 .10510 
 
 .10804 
 
 .11099 
 
 .11393 
 
 .11688 
 
 .11983 
 
 .12278 
 
 83 
 
 7 
 
 .12278 
 
 .12573 
 
 .12869 
 
 .13165 
 
 .13461 
 
 .13757 
 
 .14054 
 
 82 
 
 8 
 
 .14054 
 
 .14350 
 
 .14647 
 
 .14945 
 
 .15242 
 
 .15540 
 
 .15838 
 
 81 
 
 9 
 
 .15838 
 
 .16136 
 
 . 16435 
 
 .16734 
 
 .17033 
 
 .17332 
 
 .17632 
 
 80 
 
 10 
 
 .17632 
 
 .17932 
 
 .18233 
 
 .18533 
 
 .18834 
 
 .19136 
 
 .19438 
 
 79 
 
 11 
 
 .19438 
 
 .19740 
 
 .20042 
 
 .20345 
 
 .20648 
 
 .20951 
 
 .21255 
 
 78 
 
 12 
 
 .21255 
 
 .21559 
 
 .21864 
 
 .22169 
 
 .22474 
 
 .22780 
 
 .23086 
 
 77 
 
 13 
 
 .23086 
 
 .23393 
 
 .23700 
 
 .24007 
 
 .24315 
 
 .24624 
 
 .24932 
 
 76 
 
 14 
 
 .24932 
 
 .25242 
 
 .25551 
 
 .25861 
 
 .26172 
 
 .26483 
 
 .26794 
 
 75 
 
 15 
 
 .26794 
 
 .27106 
 
 .27419 
 
 .27732 
 
 .28046 
 
 .28360 
 
 .28674 
 
 74 
 
 16 
 
 .28674 
 
 .28989 
 
 .29305 
 
 .29621 
 
 .29938 
 
 .30255 
 
 .30573 
 
 73 
 
 17 
 
 .30573 
 
 .30891 
 
 .31210 
 
 .31529 
 
 .31850 
 
 .32170 
 
 .32492 
 
 .72 
 
 18 
 
 .32492 
 
 .32813 
 
 .33136 
 
 .33459 
 
 .33783 
 
 .34107 
 
 .34432 
 
 71 
 
 19 
 
 .34432 
 
 .34758 
 
 .35084 
 
 .35411 
 
 .35739 
 
 .36067 
 
 .36397 
 
 70 
 
 20 
 
 .36397 
 
 .36726 
 
 .37057 
 
 .37388 
 
 .37720 
 
 .38053 
 
 .38386 
 
 69 
 
 21 
 
 .38386 
 
 .38720 
 
 .39055 
 
 .39391 
 
 .39727 
 
 .40064 
 
 .40402 
 
 68 
 
 22 
 
 .40402 
 
 .40741 
 
 .41080 
 
 .41421 
 
 .41762 
 
 .42104 
 
 .42447 
 
 67 
 
 23 
 
 .42447 
 
 .42791 
 
 .43135 
 
 .43481 
 
 .43827 
 
 .44174 
 
 .44522 
 
 66 
 
 24 
 
 .44522 
 
 .44871 
 
 .45221 
 
 .45572 
 
 .45924 
 
 .46277 
 
 .46630 
 
 65 
 
 25 
 
 .46630 
 
 .46985 
 
 .47341 
 
 .47697 
 
 .48055 
 
 .48413 
 
 .48773 
 
 64 
 
 26 
 
 .48773 
 
 .49133 
 
 .49495 
 
 .49858 
 
 .50221 
 
 .50586 
 
 .50952 
 
 63 
 
 27 
 
 .50952 
 
 .51319 
 
 .51687 
 
 .52056 
 
 .52427 
 
 .52798 
 
 .53170 
 
 62 
 
 28 
 
 .53170 
 
 .53544 
 
 .53919 
 
 .54295 
 
 .54672 
 
 .55051 
 
 .55430 
 
 61 
 
 29 
 
 .55430 
 
 .55811 
 
 .56193 
 
 .50577 
 
 .56961 
 
 .57847 
 
 .57735 
 
 60 
 
 30 
 
 .57735 
 
 .58123 
 
 .58513 
 
 .58904 
 
 .59297 
 
 .59690 
 
 .60086 
 
 59 
 
 31 
 
 .60086 
 
 .60482 
 
 .60880 
 
 .61280 
 
 .61680 
 
 .62083 
 
 .62486 
 
 58 
 
 32 
 
 .62486 
 
 .62892 
 
 .63298 
 
 .63707 
 
 .64116 
 
 .64528 
 
 .64940 
 
 57 
 
 33 
 
 .64940 
 
 .65355 
 
 .65771 
 
 .66188 
 
 .66607 
 
 .67028 
 
 .67450 
 
 56 
 
 34 
 
 .67450 
 
 .67874 
 
 .68300 
 
 .68728 
 
 .69157 
 
 .69588 
 
 .70020 
 
 55 
 
 35 
 
 .70020 
 
 .70455 
 
 .70891 
 
 .71329 
 
 .71769 
 
 .72210 
 
 .72654 
 
 54 
 
 36 
 
 .72654 
 
 .73099 
 
 .73546 
 
 .73996 
 
 .74447 
 
 .74900 
 
 .75355 
 
 53 
 
 37 
 
 .75355 
 
 .75812 
 
 .76271 
 
 .76732 
 
 .77195 
 
 .77661 
 
 .78128 
 
 52 
 
 38 
 
 .78128 
 
 .78598 
 
 .79069 
 
 .79543 
 
 .80019 
 
 .80497 
 
 .80978 
 
 51 
 
 39 
 
 .80978 
 
 .81461 
 
 .81946 
 
 .82433 
 
 .82923 
 
 .83415 
 
 .83910 
 
 50 
 
 40 
 
 =83910 
 
 .84406 
 
 .84906 
 
 .85408 
 
 .85912 
 
 .86419 
 
 .86928 
 
 49 
 
 41 
 
 .86928 
 
 .87440 
 
 .87955 
 
 .88472 
 
 .88992 
 
 .89515 
 
 .90040 
 
 48 
 
 42 
 
 .90040 
 
 .90568 
 
 .91099 
 
 .91633 
 
 .92169 
 
 .92709 
 
 .93251 
 
 47 
 
 43 
 
 .93251 
 
 .93796 
 
 .94345 
 
 .94896 
 
 .95450 
 
 .96008 
 
 .96568 
 
 46 
 
 44 
 
 .96568 
 
 .97132 
 
 .97699 
 
 .98269 
 
 .98843 
 
 .99419 
 
 1.0000 
 
 45 
 
 
 60' 
 
 50' 
 
 40' 
 
 30 
 
 20' 
 
 10' 
 
 0' 
 
 Deg. 
 
 NATURAL COTANGENT. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 22 3 
 
 NATURAL TANGENT. 
 
 Deg. 
 
 0' 
 
 10' 
 
 20' 
 
 30' 
 
 40' 
 
 50' 
 
 60 
 
 
 45 
 
 1.0000 
 
 1.0058 
 
 1.0117 
 
 1.0176 
 
 1.0235 
 
 1.0295 
 
 1.0355 
 
 44 
 
 46 
 
 1.0355 
 
 1.0415 
 
 1.0476 
 
 1.0537 
 
 1.0599 
 
 1.0661 
 
 1.0723 
 
 43 
 
 47 
 
 1.0723 
 
 1.0786 
 
 1.0849 
 
 1.0913 
 
 1.0977 
 
 1.1041 
 
 1.1106 
 
 43 
 
 48 
 
 1.1106 
 
 1.1171 
 
 1 . 1236 
 
 1.1302 
 
 1.1369 
 
 1.1436 
 
 1.1503 
 
 41 
 
 49 
 
 1.1503 
 
 1.1571 
 
 1.1639 
 
 1.1708 
 
 1.1777 
 
 1.1847 
 
 1.1917 
 
 40 
 
 50 
 
 1.1917 
 
 1.1988 
 
 1.2059 
 
 1.2131 
 
 1.2203 
 
 1.2275 
 
 1.2349 
 
 39 
 
 51 
 
 1.2349 
 
 1.2422 
 
 1.2496 
 
 1.2571 
 
 1.2647 
 
 1.2723 
 
 1.2799 
 
 38 
 
 52 
 
 1.2799 
 
 1.2876 
 
 1.2954 
 
 1.3032 
 
 1.3111 
 
 1.3190 
 
 1.3270 
 
 37 
 
 53 
 
 .3270 
 
 1.3351 
 
 1.3432 
 
 1.3514 
 
 1.3596 
 
 1.3680 
 
 1.3763 
 
 36 
 
 54 
 
 .3763 
 
 1.3848 
 
 1.3933 
 
 1.4019 
 
 1.4106 
 
 1.4193 
 
 1.4281 
 
 35 
 
 55 
 
 .4281 
 
 1.4370 
 
 1.4459 
 
 1.4550 
 
 1.4641 
 
 1.4733 
 
 1.4825 
 
 34 
 
 56 
 
 .4825 
 
 1.4919 
 
 1.5013 
 
 1.5108 
 
 1.5204 
 
 1.5301 
 
 1.5398 
 
 33 
 
 57 
 
 .5398 
 
 1.5497 
 
 1.5596 
 
 1.5696 
 
 1.5798 
 
 1.5900 
 
 1.6003 
 
 32 
 
 58 
 
 1.6003 
 
 1.6107 
 
 1.6212 
 
 1.6318 
 
 1.6425 
 
 1.6533 
 
 1.6642 
 
 31 
 
 59 
 
 1.6642 
 
 1.6753 
 
 1.6864 
 
 1.6976 
 
 1.7090 
 
 1.7204 
 
 1.7320 
 
 30 
 
 60 
 
 1.7320 
 
 1.7437 
 
 1.7555 
 
 1.7674 
 
 1.7795 
 
 1.7917 
 
 1.8040 
 
 29 
 
 61 
 
 1.8040 
 
 1.8164 
 
 1.8290 
 
 1.8417 
 
 1.8546 
 
 1.8676 
 
 1.8807 
 
 28 
 
 62 
 
 1.8807 
 
 1.8940 
 
 1.9074 
 
 1.9209 
 
 1.9347 
 
 1.9485 
 
 1.9626 
 
 27 
 
 63 
 
 1.9626 
 
 1.9768 
 
 1.9911 
 
 2.0056 
 
 2.0203 
 
 2.0352 
 
 2.0503 
 
 26 
 
 64 
 
 3.0503 
 
 2.0655 
 
 2.0809 
 
 2.0965 
 
 2.1123 
 
 2.1283 
 
 2.1445 
 
 25 
 
 65 
 
 2.1445 
 
 2.1609 
 
 2.1774 
 
 2.1943 
 
 2.2113 
 
 2.2285 
 
 2.2460 
 
 24 
 
 66 
 
 2.2460 
 
 2.2637 
 
 2.2816 
 
 2.2998 
 
 2.3182 
 
 2.3369 
 
 2.3558 
 
 23 
 
 67 
 
 2.3558 
 
 2.3750 
 
 2.3944 
 
 2.4142 
 
 2.4342 
 
 2.4545 
 
 2.4750 
 
 22 
 
 68 
 
 2.4750 
 
 2.4959 
 
 2.5171 
 
 2.5386 
 
 2.5604 
 
 2.5826 
 
 2.6050 
 
 21 
 
 69 
 
 2.6050 
 
 2.6279 
 
 2.6510 
 
 2.6746 
 
 2.6985 
 
 2.7228 
 
 2.7474 
 
 20 
 
 70 
 
 2.7474 
 
 2.7725 
 
 2.7980 
 
 2.8239 
 
 2.8502 
 
 2.8770 
 
 2.9042 
 
 19 
 
 71 
 
 2.9042 
 
 2.9318 
 
 2.9600 
 
 2.9886 
 
 3.0178 
 
 3.0474 
 
 3.0776 
 
 18 
 
 72 
 
 3.0776 
 
 3.1084 
 
 3.1397 
 
 3.1715 
 
 3.2040 
 
 3.2371 
 
 3.2708 
 
 17 
 
 73 
 
 3.2708 
 
 3.3052 
 
 3.3402 
 
 3.3759 
 
 3.4123 
 
 3.4495 
 
 3.4874 
 
 16 
 
 74 
 
 3.4874 
 
 3.5260 
 
 3.5655 
 
 3.6058 
 
 3.6470 
 
 3.6890 
 
 3.7320 
 
 15 
 
 75 
 
 3.7320 
 
 3.7759 
 
 3.8208 
 
 3.8667 
 
 3.9136 
 
 3.9616 
 
 4.0107 
 
 14 
 
 76 
 
 4.0107 
 
 4.0610 
 
 4.1125 
 
 4.1653 
 
 4.2193 
 
 4.2747 
 
 4.3314 
 
 13 
 
 77 
 
 4.3314 
 
 4.3896 
 
 4.4494 
 
 4.5107 
 
 4.5736 
 
 4.6382 
 
 4.7046 
 
 12 
 
 *8 
 
 4.7046 
 
 4.7728 
 
 4.8430 
 
 4.9151 
 
 4.9894 
 
 5.0658 
 
 5.1445 
 
 11 
 
 79 
 
 5.1445 
 
 5.2256 
 
 5.3092 
 
 5.3955 
 
 5.4845 
 
 5.5763 
 
 5.6712 
 
 10 
 
 80 
 
 5.6712 
 
 5.7693 
 
 5.8708 
 
 5.9757 
 
 6.0844 
 
 6.1970 
 
 6.3137 
 
 9 
 
 81 
 
 6.3137 
 
 6.4348 
 
 6.5605 
 
 6.6911 
 
 6.8269 
 
 6.9682 
 
 7.1153 
 
 8 
 
 82 
 
 7.1153 
 
 7.2687 
 
 7.4287 
 
 7.5957 
 
 7.7703 
 
 7.9530 
 
 8.1443 
 
 7 
 
 83 
 
 8.1443 
 
 8.3449 
 
 8.5555 
 
 8.7768 
 
 9.0098 
 
 9.2553 
 
 9.5143 
 
 6 
 
 84 
 
 9.5143 
 
 9.7881 
 
 10.078 
 
 10.385 
 
 10.711 
 
 11.059 
 
 11.430 
 
 5 
 
 85 
 
 11.430 
 
 11.826 
 
 12.250 
 
 12.706 
 
 13.196 
 
 13.726 
 
 14.300 
 
 4 
 
 86 
 
 14.300 
 
 14.924 
 
 15.604 
 
 16.349 
 
 17.169 
 
 18.075 
 
 19.081 
 
 3 
 
 87 
 
 19.081 
 
 20.205 
 
 21.470 
 
 22.904 
 
 24.541 
 
 26.431 
 
 28.636 
 
 2 
 
 88 
 
 28.636 
 
 31.241 
 
 34.367 
 
 38.188 
 
 42.964 
 
 49.103 
 
 57.290 
 
 1 
 
 89 
 
 57.390 
 
 68.750 
 
 85.939 
 
 114.58 
 
 171.88 
 
 343.77 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 
 60' 
 
 50 
 
 40' 
 
 30' 
 
 20' 
 
 10' 
 
 0' 
 
 Deg. 
 
 NATURAL COTANGENT. 
 
224 
 
 Worms, 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 Special care should be taken in cutting spirals that the 
 work does not slip, and when a cut is made, it is well to 
 drop the work away from the mill while coming back for 
 another cut, or the mill may be stopped and turned to 
 such a position that the teeth will not touch the work 
 while the spiral bed is brought back preparatory to 
 another cut. 
 
 Among the spirals most commonly cut on Milling 
 Machines are worms, spiral gears, spiral mills, counter- 
 bores and twist drills. 
 
 In making such cuts as are alike on both sides, for 
 instance, the threads of worms or the teeth of spiral 
 
 Milling 
 Cutters, etc. 
 
 Setting for Spiral Mill Cutting. 
 
 gears, care must be taken to set the work centrally per- 
 pendicular with the centre line of the cutter before swing- 
 ing the spiral bed to the angle of the spiral. 
 
 Cuts that have one face radial are best made with an 
 angular cutter, as shown on page 127, for cutters of this 
 form readily clear the radial face of the cut, and so keep 
 sharp longer and produce a smoother surface than when 
 the radial face is cut in a vertical plane with a side milling 
 cutter, as shown on page 126, where the teeth can have 
 no side clearance from the work. The setting for these 
 cuts must also be made before swinging the spiral bed 
 to the angle of the spiral. 
 
 By setting the cutter, as shown in above cut, so that the 
 distance a is one-tenth the diameter B, the face cut by the 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 225 
 
 1 2 degree side of the cutter will be nearly radial for teeth 
 of milling cutters of the usual proportions. 
 
 The operation of forming a twist drill is shown in Fig. 
 77. The drill is held in a collet or chuck, and, if very 
 long, is allowed to pass through the spindle of the spiral 
 head. The cutter is placed on the arbor so that it will 
 directly over the centre of the drill, and the bed is set at 
 the angle of spiral, as given in the following table : 
 
 TABLE OF CUTTERS, PITCHES, GEARS AND ANGLES FOR 
 TWIST DRILLS. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 <H 
 
 Q 
 
 VH 
 O 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 tH 
 
 
 d 
 
 o a 
 
 rt 
 
 o ^ 
 
 fc-' 
 
 O _; 
 
 O S 
 *% 
 
 Jl 
 
 il 
 
 c 
 
 i-t SH 
 
 rt O 
 
 si 
 
 M^ 
 
 gS 
 
 o a 
 
 ll 
 
 f! 
 
 03 
 
 
 .S^ 
 
 PH hH 
 
 O *" 
 
 !_, 
 
 8 
 
 O 
 
 ^ m 
 
 s 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 02 
 
 
 
 TV 
 
 .06 
 
 .67 
 
 24 
 
 86 
 
 24 
 
 100 
 
 16 20' 
 
 1 
 
 r 
 
 .08 
 
 1.12 
 
 24 
 
 86 
 
 40 
 
 100 
 
 19 20' 
 
 t 
 
 .11 
 .15 
 
 1.67 
 1.94 
 
 24 
 32 
 
 64 
 64 
 
 32 
 
 28 
 
 72 
 
 72 
 
 19 25' 
 21 
 
 ] 
 
 % 
 
 .19 
 
 2.92 
 
 24 
 
 64 
 
 56 
 
 72 
 
 20 
 
 i 
 
 
 .23 
 
 3.24 
 
 40 
 
 48 
 
 28 
 
 72 
 
 21 
 
 f 
 
 .27 
 .31 
 
 3.89 
 4.17 
 
 56 
 40 
 
 48 
 
 72 
 
 24 
 
 48 
 
 72 
 64 
 
 20 10' 
 20 30' 
 
 T 
 
 % 
 
 u 
 
 .35 
 
 4.86 
 
 40 
 
 64 
 
 56 
 
 72 
 
 20 
 
 j 
 
 
 .39 
 
 5.33 
 
 48 
 
 40 
 
 32 
 
 72 
 
 20 12' 
 
 - 
 
 i 
 
 .44 
 
 6.12 
 
 56 
 
 40 
 
 28 
 
 64 
 
 19 30' 
 
 | 
 
 
 .50 
 
 6.48 
 
 56 
 
 48 
 
 40 
 
 72 
 
 20 
 
 - 
 
 i 
 
 .56 
 
 7.29 
 
 56 
 
 48 
 
 40 
 
 64 
 
 19 20' 
 
 
 
 .62 
 
 7.62 
 
 64 
 
 48 
 
 32 
 
 56 
 
 19 50' 
 
 \ 
 
 -i 
 
 .70 
 
 8.33 
 
 48 
 
 32 
 
 40 
 
 72 
 
 19 30' 
 
 I 1 
 
 
 .77 
 
 8.95 
 
 86 
 
 48 
 
 28 
 
 56 
 
 19 20' 
 
 H 
 
 .85 
 
 9.33 
 
 56 
 
 40 
 
 48 
 
 72 
 
 20 40' 
 
 The depth of groove in a twist drill diminishes as it 
 approaches the shank, in order to obtain increased strength 
 at the place where the drill is otherwise generally broken. 
 The variation in depth is conditional ; depending mainly 
 on the strength it is desirable to obtain, or the usage the 
 drill is subject to, as in different classes of work. To 
 
 Twist 
 Drills. 
 
226 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. GO. 
 
 secure variation in the depth of the groove, the spiral head 
 spindle is elevated slightly ; depending, in this case on the 
 length of flute, for which, when 2 inches or less in length, 
 the angle may be ^ degree ; 2 to 5 inches, ^ degree ; 5 
 inches and over, i degree. This is generally satisfactory 
 in this respect in our own work, as the drills are seldom 
 very long. 
 
 When large drills are held by the centres, the head 
 should be depressed in order to diminish the depth of 
 groove. 
 
 The outer end of the drill is supported by the centre 
 rest, as shown in Fig. 79, and when quite small should be 
 pressed down firmly, as illustrated, until the cutter has 
 passed over the end. 
 
 The elevating screw of this rest is hollow, and contains 
 a small centre piece with a V groove cut therein to aid in 
 holding the work central. This piece may be made other- 
 wise, to adapt it to special work. 
 
 Another, and very important operation on the twist 
 drill, is that of " backing off " the rear of the lip, so as to 
 give it the necessary clearance, to prevent excessive fric- 
 tional resistance. In the illustration, Fig. 80, the bed is 
 turned about y 2 degree as for cutting a right hand spiral, 
 but as the angle depends on several conditions, it will be 
 necessary to determine what the effect will be under differ- 
 ent circumstances. A slight study of the figure will be 
 sufficient for this, by assuming the effect of different 
 angles, mills and the pitches of spirals. The object of 
 placing the bed at an angle is to cause the mill E to cut 
 into the lip at / and have it just touch the surface at /. 
 The line r being parallel with the face of the mill, the 
 angular deviation of the bed is clearly shown at a, in com- 
 parison with the side or the drill. 
 
 From a little consideration it will be seen that while the 
 drill has a positive traversing and rotative movement, the 
 edge of the mill at / must always touch the lip a given dis- 
 tance from the front edge ; this being the vanishing 
 point, if such we may call it. The other surface forming 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 22 f j 
 
 the real diameter of the drill is beyond reach of the cutter, 
 and is so left to guide and steady it while in use. The 
 point e, shown in the enlarged section, Fig. 80, shows 
 where the cutting commences, and its increase until it 
 reaches a maximum depth at c, where it may be increased 
 or diminished, according to tfre angle employed in the 
 operation, the line of cutter action being represented by i i. 
 Before backing off, the surface of the smaller drills in 
 particular, should be oxidized by heating until it assumes 
 some distinct color. The object of this is to clearly show 
 the action of the mill on the lip of the drill, for, when 
 satisfactory, a uniform streak of oxidized surface, from 
 the front edge of the lip back, is left untouched by the 
 mill as represented in the cut at e. 
 
 We find it a great advantage to grind drills after they 
 are hardened, as they can then be made to run true with the 
 shank. If tapered back about .003" in 6" it will be 
 found that this clearance will cause them to run better. 
 To grind the drill it is necessary to make it with a 60 
 point, as shown in Fig. 80, so that it will run in a counter- 
 sunk centre. After grinding, this point can be ground off 
 when the drill is sharpened. 
 
 It is sometimes preferred to use left handed cutters so 
 that cut will begin at the shank end. By starting the cut 
 in at this end the tendency to lift the drill blank from the 
 rest is lessened. 
 
 When giving directions for cutting spirals in any of L 
 the foregoing pages, right hand spirals are at all times Spirals 
 referred to. For the production of left hand spirals, 
 the only changes necessary are the swinging of the spiral 
 bed to the opposite side of the centre line, the introduc- 
 tion of an intermediate gear upon the stud, Fig. 5, to 
 engage with either pair of change gears for changing the 
 direction of rotation of the spiral head spindle. 
 
228 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 FIG. 79. 
 
 FIG. 8O. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 22 9 
 
 Cutters for Making Straight Lipped Twist 
 Drills. 
 
 M 
 *H M 
 
 s 
 
 *o 
 
 s 
 
 .S ^ 
 11 
 
 1 
 
 1-16" 
 
 1 3-4" 
 
 7-8" 
 
 2 
 
 1-8 
 
 " 
 
 u 
 
 3 
 
 3-16 
 
 t & 
 
 u 
 
 4 
 
 1-4 
 
 <* 
 
 u 
 
 5 
 
 5-16 
 
 2 
 
 ; t 
 
 6 
 
 3-8 
 
 *i 
 
 *' 
 
 7 
 
 7-16 
 
 u 
 
 u 
 
 8 
 
 1-2 
 
 " 
 
 u 
 
 9 
 
 9-16 
 
 2 1-8 
 
 (( 
 
 10 
 
 5-8 
 
 * 
 
 u 
 
 11 
 
 11-16 
 
 u 
 
 u 
 
 12 
 
 3-4 
 
 2 1-4 
 
 4t 
 
 13 
 
 13-16 
 
 i 
 
 t t 
 
 14 
 
 7-8 
 
 2 1-2 
 
 K 
 
 15 
 
 15-16 
 
 4 4 
 
 (t 
 
 16 
 
 1 
 
 2 3-4 
 
 (( 
 
 17 
 
 1 1-8 
 
 ** 
 
 ( t 
 
 18 
 
 1 1-4 
 
 3 
 
 i ( 
 
 19 
 
 1 1-2 
 
 3 1-2 
 
 1 
 
 20 
 
 1 3-4 
 
 " 
 
 4 4 
 
 21 
 
 2 3 3-4 
 
 4 4 
 
230 
 
 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 List of Cutters for Making Twist Drills. 
 
 Number of 
 Cutter. 
 
 Diameter of 
 Drill. 
 
 Diameter of 
 circle made by 
 Cutter. 
 
 Hole in Cutter. 
 
 Diameter of 
 Cutter. 
 
 1 
 
 1-16 in. 
 
 .06 in. 
 
 7-8 in. 
 
 1 3-4 in. 
 
 2 
 
 1-8 
 
 .08 " 
 
 u 
 
 u 
 
 3 
 
 3-16 " 
 
 .11 " 
 
 u 
 
 u 
 
 4 
 
 1-4 " 
 
 .15 " 
 
 " 
 
 u 
 
 5 
 
 5-16 " 
 
 .19 " 
 
 It 
 
 2 in. 
 
 6 
 
 3-8 " 
 
 .23 " 
 
 t ( 
 
 u 
 
 7 
 
 7-16 " 
 
 .27 " 
 
 u 
 
 t c 
 
 8 
 
 1-2 " 
 
 .31 '* 
 
 u 
 
 1 1 
 
 9 
 
 9-16 " 
 
 .35 " 
 
 I ; 
 
 2 1-8 in. 
 
 10 
 
 5-8 " 
 
 .39 " 
 
 i. ; 
 
 u 
 
 11 
 
 11-16 " 
 
 .44 " 
 
 i C 
 
 * 
 
 12 
 
 3-4 " 
 
 .50 x " 
 
 u 
 
 2 1-4 in. 
 
 13 
 
 13-16 " 
 
 .56 " 
 
 u 
 
 u 
 
 14 
 
 7-8 " 
 
 .62 " 
 
 ( i 
 
 2 1-2 in. 
 
 15 
 
 15-16 " 
 
 .70 " 
 
 u 
 
 ( 4 
 
 16 
 
 1 " 
 
 .77 " 
 
 u 
 
 2 3-4 in. 
 
 17 
 
 1 1-8 " 
 
 .85 " 
 
 * 
 
 " 
 
 By the use of our special cutters as per list annexed, 
 Straight Lipped Twist Drills can be made by following the 
 same general instructions as those just given. 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 When spirals cannot be conveniently cut with side or 
 angular milling cutters, as previously described, it is some- 
 times convenient to use end mills, as for example, when 
 the diameter of the piece is very large, or the spiral is of 
 such a lead that the spiral bed cannot be set at the 
 requisite angle, the work is so held that its centre and 
 that of the mill will be in the same plane and the bed is 
 parallel with the ways of the machine. Fig. 8 1 is a sug- 
 gestive specimen of work done in this way. 
 
 231 
 
 FIG. 81. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Adjusting Milling Machine Spindles I7 
 
 Adjusting Milling Machine Spindles, General Description . .117 
 
 Adjusting Centre of Foot-Stock, Gauge for 24 
 
 Angles, Change Gears and Spirals, Tables of . . 218,219,220,221 
 Angles, Cutters, Pitches and Gears for Twist Drills, Table of . .225 
 Angle of Elevation of Index Spindle ....... 178 
 
 Angular Cutters, Sharpening of ^7 
 
 Arbors, Washers and Collars for 14 8 
 
 ATTACHMENTS : 
 
 Circular Milling. For Use on No. 2 Vertical Spindle Milling 
 
 Machine .......... 97 
 
 Gear Cutting. Used on No. i Universal Milling Machine 
 
 Design prior to 1893 ........ 98 
 
 Hand Milling. Used on No. o Plain Milling Machine . . 106 
 
 High Speed and Driving Fixture. Used on Nos. i and 2 Uni- 
 versal Milling Machines and i and 2 Plain Milling Machines 103 
 
 Taper Milling. Used on Nos. i and 2 Universal Milling 
 
 Machines .......... 107 
 
 Vertical Spindle Milling. Used on Nos. i, 2, 3 and 4 Univer- 
 sal Milling Machines and i, 2 and 3 Plain Milling Machines 99 
 
 Vertical Spindle Milling. Used on Nos. 4 and 5 and No. 4 
 
 Design, 1893, Universal Milling Machines . . . .102 
 
 Vertical Spindle Milling. Used on No. 24 Plain Milling 
 
 Machine .......... 103 
 
 Average Speed of Mills or Cutters ........ 142 
 
 Bevel Gears. Cutting on Universal Milling Machine. O. J. Beale 200 
 Backing off Twist Drills 226 
 
 CARE AND USE OF MILLING MACHINES : 
 
 Adjusting Spindle . . . . . . . . -117 
 
 Diameter of Main Line Pulley 115 
 
 Oiling 115 
 
 Oil Pans ........... 117 
 
 Placing Machines and Counter-shafts ..... 115 
 
 Castings and Forgings, Pickling ....... 148 
 
 Centres, Index, 10" no 
 
234 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Centres, Index, 8 ' and 6%" Single Dial ...... 109 
 
 Change Gears, Rules for Obtaining Ratio of 214 
 
 Change Gears, Selection of, for Cutting Spirals .... 212 
 
 Change Gears, Rules for ascertaining Spiral Cut by any given Gear 215 
 
 Change Gears, Spirals, and Angles, Tables of . 218, 219, 220, 221 
 
 Circular Milling Attachment ........ 97 
 
 Clearance of Mills 134 
 
 Close Limit Slot Cutting 160 
 
 Collars and Washers for Arbors . . . . . . . . 148 
 
 Cored T Slots in Cast Iron, Milling 160 
 
 Cotangents and Tangents, Natural, Tables of . . . . 222, 223 
 
 Cotter Mills 134 
 
 Counter-shafts, Placing, Speed of . . . . . . -115 
 
 Cutting Angle of Teeth of Mills 133 
 
 Cutting Bevel Gears in a Universal Milling Machine. O. J. Beale . 200 
 Cutting Gears . . . . . . . . . . .184 
 
 Cutting off Stock ........... 149 
 
 Cutting Left Hand Spirals ......... 227 
 
 Cutting Slots ........... 154 
 
 Cutting Spirals, Cutters Used for ....... 224 
 
 Cutting Spirals, Setting Cutter for 224 
 
 Cutting Spirals with End Mills 231 
 
 Cutting Twist Drills 225 
 
 Cutting Worms ........... 224 
 
 COMPOUND INDEXING : 
 
 Adjustable Back Pin . . . ... ... . . 198 
 
 Approximate Indexing 190 
 
 Explanation of Tables ........ 190 
 
 Extra Divisions by Use of Adjustable Back Pin . . . 198 
 
 Manner of Using Machines 189 
 
 Method of Combining the Two Index Settings .... 188 
 
 Proof of Correctness of Moves ....... 189 
 
 Use of Compound Movements. (Schneider's Method.) . . 197 
 Table of Compound Index Movements for Nos. i, 2, 3, and 4, 
 Design 1893, Universal Milling Machines. (Schneider's 
 
 Method.) .......... 197 
 
 Tables of Compound Index Movements . 191, 192, 193, 194, 195 
 
 CUTTERS : 
 
 6" and Above, Speed of. Addy. Briggs. .... 143 
 
 Direction of Work Moved Under 141 
 
 Dividing with Index Head ........ 182 
 
 For Making Straight Lipped Twist Drills 229 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 235 
 
 For Making Twist Drills, List of 230 
 
 Milling, etc., Used in Cutting Spirals . . . . . . 224 
 
 Pitches, Gears and Angles for Cutting Twist Drills, Table of . 225 
 
 Rule for Finding Pitch of Teeth of. Addy. . . , . 133 
 
 Speed of ........... 142 
 
 T Slot 158 
 
 Used for Cutting Spirals ........ 224 
 
 CUTTERS OR MILLS USED ON MILLING MACHINES : 
 
 Clearance of Mills ......... 134 
 
 Cutting Angle of Teeth of Mills 133 
 
 Diameter of Hole in Cutters . . . . . . -131 
 
 Diameter of Mills ....,..,. 129 
 
 English Cutters .......... 133 
 
 Fly Cutter, Formed Mills or Cutters 124 
 
 Gang Cutters 124 
 
 Grade of Emery Wheel for Sharpening . 136 
 
 Length of Mills . . . . . . . . . . 131 
 
 Number of Teeth of . . . - . . . . -131 
 
 Outline Cuts Showing Form of Cuts 129 
 
 Sharpening Angular and Formed Cutters . . . . . 137 
 
 Sharpening Mills ......... 136 
 
 Sketches 134 
 
 Templets ........... 136 
 
 Use of Emery Wheel, Width of Face ...... 136 
 
 Decimal Equivalents, Table of ........ 158 
 
 Depth of Groove Cut in Tap . . 182 
 
 Diameter of Hole in Mills 131 
 
 Diameter of Main Line Pulley . . . . . . . 115 
 
 Diameter of Mills or Cutters ........ 129 
 
 Dimensions of Universal Milling Machines ..... 4 
 
 Direction of Work Moved Undei a Mill ...... 141 
 
 Direct Indexing. (See Indexing.) ....... 176 
 
 Dividing Cutters, etc., with Index Head 182 
 
 Dovetailed Key-Way Cutting 158 
 
 Drills, Twist, Backing Off of 226 
 
 Drills, Grinding after Hardening 227 
 
 Driving Fixture and High Speed Attachment 103 
 
 Emery Wheel for Sharpening Mills or Cutters, Grade of, Use of, 
 
 Width of Face 136 
 
 End Mill with Centre Cut 154 
 
 End Mills, Cutting Spirals with .... . 231 
 
 Ends of Small Pieces, Squaring 149 
 
 English Cutters or Mills 133 
 
 Examples of Work Done on Milling Machines .... 149 
 
236 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF OPERATIONS ON MILLING MACHINES : 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Average Speed of Mills . . . . . . .142 
 
 Cutting off Stock i 49 
 
 Cutting Slots .......... 154 
 
 Direction of Work Moved Under Mills or Cutters . . .141 
 
 End Mill with Centre Cut 154 
 
 Examples of Work done on Milling Machines .... 149 
 
 Experiments Testing Method of Moving Work Under Cutter . 141 
 Fixtures for Small Work . , . . . . . .152 
 
 Limits in Milling ......... 144 
 
 Lubricant for Use with Pump ....... 140 
 
 Pickling Castings and Forgings . . . . . . . 148 
 
 Selection of Work, Setting Vise with Plain Base . . . 148 
 
 Squaring Ends of Small Pieces ....... 149 
 
 Speed for Cutters 6" Diameter and Above. Addy. Briggs . 143 
 
 Speed of Mills or Cutters 142 
 
 T Slot Cutter 158 
 
 Tables of Speeds and Feeds ...... 145, 146, 147 
 
 Use of Oil on Cutters or Work ....... 140 
 
 Use of Two or More Mills at One Time 150 
 
 Washers and Collars for Arbors . . . . ... 148 
 
 Experiments to Test Method of Running Cutter . . . . 141 
 
 Face, Width of, Emery Wheels 136 
 
 Fixtures for Small Work ......... 152 
 
 Fixture for Milling Key-Ways ........ 174 
 
 Fluting Taps and Reamers ......... 182 
 
 Fly Cutters 124 
 
 Foot-stock, Gauge for Adjusting ....... 24 
 
 Foot-stock, Indexing, Construction Nos. 2, 3, 4, Universal Milling 
 
 Machine Design, 1893 ........ 22 
 
 Forgings and Castings, Pickling 148 
 
 Formed Cutters or Mills ......... 124 
 
 Formed Cutters or Mills, Sharpening ...... 137 
 
 Gang Cutters 124, 152 
 
 Gauge for Adjusting Foot-stock Centres 24 
 
 Gears, Angles, Pitches and Cutters, for Twist Drills, Table of . 225 
 
 Gears, Bevel, Cutting in a Universal Milling Machine. O. J. Beale 200 
 
 Gears, Cutting . . . 184 
 
 Gear Cutting Attachment 98 
 
 Grade of Emery Wheel for Sharpening Mills ..... 136 
 
 Grinding Twist Drills after Hardening 227 
 
 Grooves in Taps, Depth of 182 
 
 Hand Milling Attachment, for No. o Plain Milling Machine . . 106 
 
 Head, Index, and Centres, with Centre Rest 108 
 
 High Speed Milling Attachment and Driving Fixture . . -103 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 237 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Robbing Worm Wheels 186 
 
 Hobs with Relieved Teeth 186 
 
 Hole in Mills or Cutters, Diameter of ...... 131 
 
 Indexing, Compound. (See Compound Indexing.) .... 188 
 
 Indexing, Direct . . . . . . . . . . .176 
 
 Index Plate 176 
 
 Index Plate Sector 178 
 
 Index Tables . . . . . . . . . .179, 180 
 
 Index Centres, 8" and 6%" Single Dial 109 
 
 Index Centres, 10" no 
 
 Index Head and Centres, with Centre Rest 108 
 
 Indexing Head Stock or Spiral Head. Used on Nos. i and 4, No. 3 
 
 Prior to 1893. Universal Milling Machines. 
 
 Change Gears, Chuck ........ 10 
 
 Construction . . . . . . . . 7, 10, 1 1, 12 
 
 Crank Pin ........... 10 
 
 Cutting Spirals ...... 10 
 
 Cutting Spirals not given in Tables 13 
 
 Elevation of Head ......... 10 
 
 Sector ........... 10 
 
 Indexing Head Stock or Spiral Head. Used on Nos. 2, 3 and 4, 
 
 Universal Milling Machines, Design of 1893. 
 Construction ......... 20, 22 
 
 Foot-stock Construction ........ 22 
 
 Gauge for Adjusting Centre 24 
 
 To Throw Worm Out of Gear 22 
 
 Kev-ways, Fixture for Milling . . . . . . . . 174 
 
 Key-way, Milling Dovetailed 158 
 
 Lathe Carriage, Milling of ......... 160 
 
 Left Hand Spirals, Cutting ......... 227 
 
 Length of Mills or Cutters .... .... 131 
 
 Limits in Milling . . . f . . . . . . 144 
 
 Lubricant to Use with Pump ........ 140 
 
 Machines, Placing 115 
 
 Main Line Pulley, Diameter of 115 
 
 Material, Workmanship and Design . . . . . . 113 
 
 MILLING MACHINES, CARE AND USE OF : 
 
 Adjusting Spindle 117 
 
 Counter-shafts, Diameter of Main Line Pulley, Oiling . . 115 
 
 Oil Pans ........... 117 
 
 Placing Machines 115 
 
 Speed of counter-shafts . . . 115 
 
 Milling Machines and Skill . . . . . . . .119 
 
 Milling Machines, Plain, General Description . . . . . 45 
 
238 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 MILLING : 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Cored T Slots in Cast Iron 160 
 
 Faces of Worm Wheels 186 
 
 Lathe Carriage 160 
 
 Limits in 144 
 
 Rack Teeth, with Formed Cutter 160 
 
 Round Ends of Pieces ........ 167 
 
 Worm Wheels, Hobbing 186 
 
 Milling Machines, Use of in Cutting Spirals ..... 216 
 Milling Operations in the Manufacture of the No. i Universal Mil- 
 ling Machine Spiral Head and Foot-stock .... 168 
 Milling Operations in the Manufacture of the No. 2 Universal Mil- 
 ling Machine .......... 170 
 
 MILLS : 
 
 Clearance of . . . . . . . . . . 134 
 
 Cotter ............ 134 
 
 Cutting Angle of Teeth of 133 
 
 Diameter of ........... 129 
 
 Diameter of Hole in . . . . . . . " . 131 
 
 End, with Centre Cut ......... 154 
 
 Formed . . . . . . . . . . .124 
 
 Length of . . . . . . , . . . 131 
 
 Sharpening of 136 
 
 Simultaneous Use of Two or More 150 
 
 Sketches of ........... 134 
 
 Speed of 142 
 
 Straddle, Use of 152 
 
 Tempering of .......... 131 
 
 Templets 136 
 
 Natural Tangents and Cotangents, Tables of . . . . 222, 223 
 
 Number of Teeth of Mills . . . . . . . . 131 
 
 Number of Teeth of Gears to Cut Spirals, Rules for . . .214 
 
 Oil on the Cutters or Work, Use of 140 
 
 Oiling Machines . . . . . . . . . . 115 
 
 Oil Pans . . . . . . . . . , . 117 
 
 Oil Pump, Method of Attaching 68 
 
 Oil Pump, Lubricant to Use With 140 
 
 Operations, Milling, in the Manufacture of the No. I Universal Mil- 
 ling Machine Spiral Head and Foot-stock .... 168 
 Operations, Milling, in the Manufacture of the No. 2 Universal Mil- 
 ling Machine .......... 170 
 
 Operations, Special 160 
 
 Outline Cuts, Showing Form Cut by different Cutters . . . 129 
 
 Pans, Oil .117 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 239 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Pickling Castings and Forgings I4 8 
 
 Pitch of Teeth of Cutters or Mills 133 
 
 Pitches, Cutters, Gears and Angles for Twist Drills, Table of . 225 
 
 Placing Machines and Counter-shafts 115 
 
 Placing Tools . . . uy 
 
 PLAIN MILLING MACHINES: 
 
 Dimension Tables . . ... . . . . 46, 47 
 
 General Description ......... 45 
 
 No. o Plain Milling Machine, Rack or Screw Feed. 
 
 Accessories, Adjustable Dials, Automatic Feed of Table . . 51 
 
 Capacity 48 
 
 Cone .49 
 
 Counter-shaft . . . . . . . . . -51 
 
 Feed Table 50 
 
 Frame 51 
 
 Hand Milling Attachment ........ 106 
 
 Overhanging Arm, Spindle ....... 49 
 
 Table, Vises 51 
 
 No. i Plain Milling Machine, Rack or Screw Feed. 
 
 Accessories, Adjustable Dials, Automatic Feed of Table . . 56 
 
 Capacity 52 
 
 Cone 53 
 
 Counter-shaft 56 
 
 Feed Tables . 54i 55 
 
 Frame ........... 56 
 
 High Speed Milling Attachment and Driving Fixture . . 103 
 
 Overhanging Arm, Spindle, Table ...... 53 
 
 Vertical Spindle Milling Attachment ..... 99 
 
 Vises 56 
 
 No. 2 Plain Milling Machine, Rack or Screw Feed. 
 
 Accessories, Adjustable Dials ....... 62 
 
 Automatic Feed of Table . ....... 59 
 
 Capacity 58 
 
 Cone 59 
 
 Countershaft 62 
 
 Feed Tables 60, 6 1 
 
 Frame ............ 62 
 
 High Speed Milling Attachment and Driving Fixture . . 103 
 
 Overhanging Arm, Spindle, Table ...... 59 
 
 Vertical Spindle Milling Attachment ...... 99 
 
 Vises ............ 62 
 
 No. 3 Plain Milling Machine. 
 
 Accessories, Adjustable Dials 6$ 
 
 Automatic Feed of Table 65 
 
240 BROWN A SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Capacity 64 
 
 Cone 65 
 
 Counter-shaft 68 
 
 Feed Table 66 
 
 Frame 68 
 
 Oil Pump 68 
 
 Overhanging Arm 65 
 
 Speed and Feed Tables 145 
 
 Spindle, Table 65 
 
 Vertical Spindle Milling Attachment . . . . -99 
 
 Vise 68 
 
 No. 4 Plain Milling Machine, No. 6 Prior to 1893. 
 
 Accessories, Adjustable Dials ....... 74 
 
 Automatic Feed of Table 71 
 
 Capacity ........... 70 
 
 Cone ............ 71 
 
 Counter-shaft 74 
 
 Feed Table 73 
 
 Frame, Knee, Oil Pump ........ 74 
 
 Overhanging Arm . . . . . . . . 71 
 
 Speed and Feed Table 146 
 
 Spindle, Table 71 
 
 Vertical Spindle, Milling Attachment 102 
 
 Vise 74 
 
 No. 5 Plain Milling Machine, No. 8 Prior to 1893. 
 
 Accessories, Adjustable Dials ....... 78 
 
 Automatic Feed of Table 77 
 
 Capacity ........... 76 
 
 Cone 77 
 
 Counter-shaft, Frame 78 
 
 Oil Pump 78 
 
 Overhanging Arm ......... 77 
 
 Speed and Feed Table . 147 
 
 Spindle, Table 77 
 
 Vertical Spindle Milling Attachment 102 
 
 Vise 78 
 
 No. 12 Plain Milling Machine. 
 
 Accessories .82 
 
 Automatic Feed of Table Si 
 
 Capacity 80 
 
 Cone Si 
 
 Counter-shaft 82 
 
 Fitted for Use in Cutting Sprocket Wheels and Bicycle Chain 
 
 Centres 84 
 
 Oil Tank and Pump 82 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 241 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Overhanging Arm .......... 8l 
 
 Spindle, Table 81 
 
 Vise 82 
 
 No. 13 Plain Milling Machine, No. 3 Prior to 1893. 
 
 Accessories 88 
 
 Automatic Feed of Table 87 
 
 Capacity 86 
 
 Cone 87 
 
 Counter-shaft 88 
 
 Oil Tank and Pump, Overhanging Arm . 87 
 
 Spindle, Table . . . 87 
 
 Vise .88 
 
 No. 23 Plain Milling Machine, No. 5 Prior to 1893. 
 
 Accessories ........... 92 
 
 Automatic Feed of Table ........ 91 
 
 Capacity 90 
 
 Cone ............ 91 
 
 Counter-shaft, Dials ......... 92 
 
 Head, Overhanging Arm ........ 91 
 
 Spindle, Table 91 
 
 Vise ............ 92 
 
 No. 24 Plain Milling Machine, No. 7 Prior io 1893. 
 
 Accessories ........... 94 
 
 Automatic Feed of Table ........ 93 
 
 Capacity, Cone .......... 93 
 
 Counter-shaft, Dials ......... 94 
 
 Head, Overhanging Arm . . . . . . . 93 
 
 Spindle, Table 93 
 
 Vertical Spindle Milling Attachment ...... 103 
 
 Vise ............ 94 
 
 Plate, Index 176 
 
 Position of Spiral Bed in Cutting Spirals ...... 215 
 
 Pulley, Main Line, Rule for Finding Diameter of . . . 115 
 
 Pump, Oil, Method of Attachment 68 
 
 Rack Teeth, Milling 160 
 
 Reamers and Taps, Fluting 182 
 
 Rounding Ends of Pieces ......... 167 
 
 Rules for Obtaining Ratio of Gears to Cut Spiral .... 214 
 
 Rule for Determining Number of Teeth of Gears to Cut Spiral . 214 
 
 Rule for Ascertaining Spiral Cut by any given Change Gears . . 215 
 
 Sharpening Mills or Cutters ........ 136 
 
 Sharpening Angular Cutters 137 
 
 Sharpening formed Cutters ........ 137 
 
 Sector 178 
 
 Selection of Change Gears for Cutting Spirals ..... 212 
 
242 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 Setting Vise with Plain Base ... . 148 
 
 Setting Cutters for Cutting Spiials . ..... 224 
 
 Sketches of Mills or Cutters ........ 134 
 
 Skill, Milling Machines and . ...... 119 
 
 Slots, Cutting .......... . 154 
 
 Slot Cutting to Close Limit 160 
 
 Small Work, Fixtures for ......... 152 
 
 Special Operations .......... 160 
 
 Special Vise Jaws 152 
 
 Speed, Average, of Mills or Cutters ....... 142 
 
 Speed of Counter-shafts . . . . . . . . . 115 
 
 Speed of Cutters 6" and Upward. Addy. Briggs . . . 143 
 
 SPEED AND FEED TABLES : 
 
 No. 3 Plain Milling Machine ....... 145 
 
 No. 4 Plain Milling Machine ....... 146 
 
 No. 5 Plain Milling Machine . . . . . . 147 
 
 Speed of Mills ........... 142 
 
 Spindle, Index, Change in Angle of Elevation ..... 178 
 
 Spindle, Index, Testing Setting of 184 
 
 Spindle, Method of Adjusting ........ 17 
 
 Spirals, Number of Teeth of Gears for Cutting .... 214 
 
 Spirals, Change Gears, and Angles, Tables of . . 218, 219, 220, 221 
 
 Spirals, Cutting Left Hand ........ 227 
 
 Spirals, Cutting, with End Mills ....... 231 
 
 Spiral Bed, Position of, in Cutting Spirals . . . . . 215 
 
 Spirals, Milling Cutters used for Cutting ..... 224 
 
 Spiral Head or Indexing Head Stock, Used on Nos. i and 4, No. 3 
 Prior to 1893, Universal Milling Machine. See Indexing 
 Head Stock. 
 
 Construction 7. 10, n, 12 
 
 Change Gears, Chuck, Crank Pin ...... 10 
 
 Cutting Spirals, .......... 10 
 
 Cutting Spirals not given in Tables ...... 13 
 
 Elevation of Head ......... 10 
 
 Sector 10 
 
 Spiral Head or Indexing Head Stock, Used on Nos. 2, 3 and 4, Uni- 
 versal Milling Machines, Design of 1893. 
 Construction ......... 20, 22 
 
 Foot-stock Construction ........ 22 
 
 Gauge for Adjusting Centre ....... 24 
 
 To Throw Worm Out of Gear 22 
 
 Squaring Ends of Small Pieces 149 
 
 Stock, Cutting Off ... 149 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 243 
 
 Stock and Special Cutters 129 
 
 Straddle Mills, Use of 152 
 
 TABLES: 
 
 Change Gears, Spirals and Angles . . . 218, 219, 220, 221 
 
 Compound Indexing 191, 192, 193, 194, 195 
 
 Cutters, Pitches, Gears and Angles for Twist Drills . . . 225 
 Cutters for Making Straight-lipped Twist Drills . . . 229 
 
 Decimal Equivalents . . . . . . . . .1158 
 
 Dimensions of Plain Milling Machines .... 46, 47 
 
 Dimensions of Universal Milling Machines .... 4 
 
 Direct Indexing ......... 179, 180 
 
 Extra Divisions by Use of Back Pin, (Compound Indexing) . 198 
 Feed for No. I Universal Milling Machine .... 8 
 
 For Setting when Cutting with Tap and Reamer Cutters . . 183 
 Speed and Feed No. 3 Plain Milling Machine .... 145 
 
 Speed and Feed No. 4 Plain Milling Machine .... 146 
 
 Speed and Feed No. 5 Plain Milling Machine .... 147 
 
 Tangents and Cotangents, Natural . . . . 222, 223 
 Taper Milling Attachment for Nos. i and 2 Universal Milling Ma- 
 chine ...... 107 
 
 Taps and Reamers, Fluting ........ 182 
 
 Teeth of Mills or Cutters, Number of . . . . . . 131 
 
 Teeth of Mills or Cutters, Cutting Angle of 133 
 
 Teeth, Rule for Finding Pitch of Cutters. Addy . . . .133 
 
 Tempering of Mills . . .131 
 
 Templets of Mills or Cutters 136 
 
 Tool Makers Universal Vise in 
 
 Tools, Placing 117 
 
 T Slots, Cored in Cast Iron, Cutting 160 
 
 T Slot Cutters 158 
 
 Testing Method of Running Cutter, Experiments for . . . 141 
 
 Testing Setting of Index Head Spindle 184 
 
 Twist Drills, Backing Off 226 
 
 Twist Drill Cutting 225 
 
 Twist Drills, List of Cutters for Making ...... 230 
 
 UNIVERSAL MILLING MACHINES : 
 
 Dimension Table 4 
 
 General Description i 
 
 No. I Universal Milling Machine. 
 
 Accessories ........... 13 
 
 Adjustable Dials, Automatic Feed of Table .... 7 
 
 Capacity ' 5 
 
244 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Cone ............ 6 
 
 Countershaft 13 
 
 Gear Cutting Attachment 98 
 
 High Speed Milling Attachment and Driving Fixture . . 103 
 
 Indexing Head-stock or Spiral-head ...... 7 
 
 Chuck, Construction ........ 10 
 
 Index Plates 13 
 
 Motion . . . . . . . . . . .10 
 
 Spirals not given in Tables ....... 13 
 
 Tables 10 
 
 Knee 7 
 
 Oiling 13 
 
 Overhanging Arm ......... 6 
 
 Overhead Works .......... 13 
 
 Saddle, Spindle ' .... 6 
 
 Stop Rod 7 
 
 Table 6 
 
 Taper Milling Attachment . . . . ... . 107 
 
 Vise , 13 
 
 Vertical Spindle Millig Attachment 99 
 
 No. 2 Universal Milling Machine. 
 
 Accessories ........... 24 
 
 Adjustable Dials, Automatic Feed of Table .... 20 
 
 Capacity . . . . . . . . . .16 
 
 Cone 17 
 
 Counter-shaft .......... 24 
 
 Feed Tables 21 
 
 Foot-stock Construction 22 
 
 Frame . . . . . . , . .24 
 
 Gauge for Adjusting Foot-stock Spindle ..... 24 
 
 High Speed Milling Attachment and Driving Fixture . . 103 
 Index Head-stock or Spiral Head, Construction, Method of 
 
 Operating, Tables 22 
 
 Knee 20 
 
 Overhanging Arm ......... 17 
 
 Saddle 20 
 
 Spindle 17 
 
 Stop Rod 20 
 
 Table .17 
 
 Taper Milling Attachment 107 
 
 Vertical Spindle Milling Attachment 99 
 
 Vise 24 
 
 No. 3 Universal Milling Machine. 
 
 Accessories ' . 33 
 
 Adjustable Dials, Automatic Feed of Table .... 2^ 
 
BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 245 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Capacity 26 
 
 Cone ............. 27 
 
 Counter-shaft .......... 33 
 
 Feed Table 31 
 
 Foot-stock, Frame ......... 32 
 
 Knee ............ 29 
 
 Overhanging Arm ......... 27 
 
 Power Transverse Feed 27 
 
 Saddle 29 
 
 Spindle . ........ 27 
 
 Spiral Head .......... 32 
 
 Table 27 
 
 Vertical Spindle Milling Attachment ...... 99 
 
 Vise 32 
 
 No. 4 Universal Milling Machine, Design of 1893. 
 
 Accessories ........... 38 
 
 Adjustable Dials, Automatic Feed of Table .... 36 
 
 Capacity ........... 34 
 
 Cone 35 
 
 Counter-shaft .......... 38 
 
 Feed Table 37 
 
 Foot-stock Spindle 38 
 
 Knee 36 
 
 Overhanging Arm ......... 35 
 
 Power Transverse Feed ........ 35 
 
 Saddle, 36 
 
 Spindle ........... 3^ 
 
 Spiral Head . . 36 
 
 Table 35 
 
 Vertical Spindle Milling Attachment ...... 99 
 
 Vise 38 
 
 No 4 Universal Milling Machine, No. 3 Prior to 1893. 
 
 Accessories ........... 4-5 
 
 Adjustable Dials, Automatic Feed of Table .... 41 
 
 Capacity ........... 40 
 
 Cone 41 
 
 Counter-shaft .......... 43 
 
 Overhanging Arm ......... 41 
 
 Spindle ........... 41 
 
 Spiral Head and Foot-stock Centres . . . . . -41 
 
 Vertical Spindle Milling Attachment 99 
 
 Vise 43 
 
 Universal Vise, Tool Makers . . . . . . . . in 
 
 Use of Machines in Compound Indexing .... . 189 
 
 Use of Milling Machines, Examples of Operations .... 140 
 
246 BROWN & SHARPE MFG. CO. 
 
 PAGB. 
 
 Direction in which Work is Moved Under Mills, Experiments 
 to Test Method of Running Cutter, Lubricant for Use with 
 
 Pump, Oil on the Cutters or Work . . 141 
 
 Limits in Milling ......... 144 
 
 Speed of Mills 142 
 
 Use of Milling Machines in Cutting Spirals ..... 216 
 
 Use of Oil on the Cutters or Work 140 
 
 Use of One or More Mills or Cutters, Simultaneous . . . 150 
 Vertical Spindle Milling Machine, No. 2. 
 
 Accessories ........... 97 
 
 Automatic Feed of Table 96 
 
 Circular Milling Attachment . . . . . . -97 
 
 Cone 9 6 
 
 Counter-shaft 97 
 
 Spindle, Table 9 6 
 
 Vertical Adjustment 96 
 
 Vertical Spindle Milling Attachments .... 99, 102, 103 
 
 Vertical Spindle Milling Machine, Samples of Work done on . . 167 
 
 Vise Jaws, Special 152 
 
 Vise with Plain Base, Setting ........ 148 
 
 Vise, Tool Makers Universal in 
 
 Washers and Collars for Arbors 148 
 
 Wheels, Emery, for Sharpening Mills or Cutters .... 136 
 
 Width of Face of Emery Wheels for Grinding Mills or Cutters . 136 
 
 Work Done on Milling Machines, Examples of .... 149 
 
 Work Moved Under a Mill, Direction of 141 
 
 Worms, Cutting 224 
 
 Worm Wheels, Robbing, Milling Faces of 186 
 

SEVENTH DAY 
 
YC 
 
 GENERAL LIBRARY - U.C. BERKELEY 
 
 80005311,^? 
 
 
 
 CMJf*) 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 
 
 . . 
 
 : |!